smu account assignment solved

410
01-Financial Accounting – An Introduction Structure: 1.1 Introduction Objectives 1.2 Meaning of Accountancy, book-keeping and Accounting 1.3 Accounting Process 1.4 Objectives for accounting 1.5 Differences between book-keeping and accounting 1.6 Users of accounting information 1.7 Limitations of Accounting 1.8 Basic terminologies 1.9 Summary 1.10 Terminal Questions 1.11 Answers 1.1 Introduction All of you at one point of time would have visited a grocery shop or a medical shop. You might have wondered how the business person maintains the record of all the transactions done during a particular period of time say a year. You might have also thought why he or she has to maintain a record, how is it beneficial and whether it is mandatory or not? As against this, imagine the role of a business organization. They provide goods that might range from simple safety pin to fighter aircrafts. Those who are in service industry provide various services such as transportation services, hospitality services, developing complex software programmes etc.

Upload: anupam-rana

Post on 02-Jan-2016

646 views

Category:

Documents


2 download

DESCRIPTION

Account for the managers

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: smu account assignment solved

01-Financial Accounting – An Introduction

Structure:

1.1 Introduction

Objectives

1.2 Meaning of Accountancy, book-keeping and Accounting

1.3 Accounting Process

1.4 Objectives for accounting

1.5 Differences between book-keeping and accounting

1.6 Users of accounting information

1.7 Limitations of Accounting

1.8 Basic terminologies

1.9 Summary

1.10 Terminal Questions

1.11 Answers

1.1 Introduction

All of you at one point of time would have visited a grocery shop or a medical shop. You might have wondered how the business person maintains the record of all the transactions done during a particular period of time say a year. You might have also thought why he or she has to maintain a record, how is it beneficial and whether it is mandatory or not? As against this, imagine the role of a business organization. They provide goods that might range from simple safety pin to fighter aircrafts. Those who are in service industry provide various services such as transportation services, hospitality services, developing complex software programmes etc.

To make sound decision a business enterprise need accounting information. This information is also needed by government agencies, regulatory bodies, analyst and individuals at various point of time and at different levels.

Accounting is perhaps one of the oldest, structured management information system. It has evolved in response to the social and economic needs of society. Accounting as an information system is concerned with identification, measurement and communication of economic information of an organization to its users who may need the information for rational decision

Page 2: smu account assignment solved

making. The accounting system is a means to provide relevant and reliable financial information to all the interested parties.

In this unit we are dealt the meaning of accounting, book-keeping and accountancy, the steps involved in accounting process. It explains the various objectives of accounting, discusses the difference between book-keeping and accounting and how accounting information is used by various users of accounting information. This unit concludes with basic terminologies in accountancy.

Objectives:

After going through this unit, you should be able to:

1. Define book keeping, accounting and accountancy

2. Describe the accounting process

3. Explain the objectives of accounting

4. Distinguish between book keeping and accounting

5. Categorize various users of accounting information

6. Acquaint with the basic terminology used in the subject.

1.2 Meaning of Book-keeping, Accounting and Accountancy

Accounting as a discipline was introduced to have permanent and systematic record of business transactions. This would help a business person to record all relevant business transactions, to ascertain the profit earned during a particular period and finally evaluate the financial position of his/her business. Book keeping, accounting and accountancy are the terms used in the science of financial accounting.

Book-keeping is defined as the science and art of recording business transactions in a systematic manner in a certain set of books known as books of accounts. It identifies the transactions and events, measures the identified transactions and events in a common measuring unit, records them in proper books of accounts and finally classifies them in another book called the ledger.

Accounting is termed as language of business which records all events and transactions that are of monetary value and facilitates communication among individuals in a society.

Accountancy refers to a systematic knowledge of accounting. It explains ‘why to do’ and ‘how to do’ of various aspects of accounting. It tells us why and how to prepare the books of accounts and how to summarize the accounting information and communicate it to the interested parties.

1.3 Accounting Process

Page 3: smu account assignment solved

Accounting is the process of identifying the transactions and events, measuring the transactions and events in terms of money, recording them in a systematic manner in the books of accounts, classifying or grouping them and finally summarizing the transactions in a manner useful to the users of accounting information.

1. Identifying the transactions and events: This is the first step of accounting process. It identifies the transaction of financial character that is required to be recorded in the books of accounts. Transaction is transfer of money or goods or services from one person or account to another person or account. Events happen as a result of internal policies or external needs. Events of non financial character cannot be recorded even though such events may have an impact on the operational results of the firm.

2. Measuring: This denotes expressing the value of business transactions and events in terms of money (in terms of rupees in India).

3. Recording: It deals with recording of identifiable and measurable transactions and events in a systematic manner in the books of original entry that are in accordance with the principles of accountancy.

4. Classifying: It deals with periodic grouping of transactions of similar nature that appear in the books of original entry into appropriate heads by posting or transfer entries. For Eg: All purchases of goods made for cash or on credit on different dates are brought to purchase account.

5. Summarizing: It deals with summarizing or condensing transactions in a manner useful to the users. This function involves the preparation of financial statements such as income statement, balance sheet, statement of changes in financial position and cash flow statement.

6. Analyzing: It deals with the establishment of relationship between the various items or group of items taken from income statement or balance sheet or both. Its purpose is to identify the financial strengths and weaknesses of the enterprise. The above six process in the present day scenario are generally performed using software packages.

7. Interpreting: It deals with explaining the significance of those data in a manner that the end users of the financial statement can make a meaningful judgment about the profitability and financial position of the business. The accountants should interpret the statement in a manner useful to the users, so as to enable the user to make reasoned decision out of the alternative

Page 4: smu account assignment solved

course of action. They should explain various factors on what has happened, why it happened, and what is likely to happen under specific conditions.

8. Communicating: It deals with communicating the analyzed and interpreted data in the form of financial reports/ statements to the users of financial information eg Profit and loss account, Balance Sheet, Cash flow and Funds Flow statement, Auditors report etc.

The Accounting Information System

Source: Adapted from Financial Accounting, Management perspective by R. Narayaswamy.

Self Assessment Questions

1. Book keeping _________ the transactions and events, _________the identified transactions and events in a common measuring unit, records them in proper books of accounts and finally classifies them in the ledger.

2. Accounting in addition to book keeping involves ________ the classified transactions and ________ the summarized results.

3. ____________ interprets the analyzed results and communicates the interpreted information to the interested parties.

1.4 Objectives of Accounting

From the above paragraphs, it can be concluded that accounting involves the following functions and objectives.

Page 5: smu account assignment solved

a) Accounting helps in systematic recording of all business events or transactions. Written records are more preferable to memorizing (oral recording) because the latter may fade away with time. Also systematic records can be used by different persons for different decision making purposes.

b) Accounting measure the financial performance of the enterprise. The results of operations are ascertained by preparing profit and loss account, balance sheet and cash flow statements. This will enable the business person to ascertain what the business owes to others, what others owe them and whether his/her capital remained same or increased or decreased.

c) Accounting facilitates in reporting the results to both internal and external users. The management requires information for internal purpose at various levels of operations. They need to prepare various reports such as production report, idle time report, cash budget report, receivable report, accounts payable report, project appraisal report, capital budgeting report etc. The management reports the financial performance of the firm to external users such as shareholders, creditors, bankers, investors, stock brokers, stock exchanges, employees, governments etc.,

d) Accounting is required to fulfill the statutory requirements of various regulatory bodies such as Registrar of Companies, SEBI (Securities Exchange Board of India) income tax authorities and the Government.

e) Accounting helps in internal control by holding the concerned persons responsible for any errors, lapses or under performance. Equally it helps to identify the strong /weak areas of each unit or department.

Accounting is a tool for effective planning. Current year’s financial performance becomes the basis for future predictions and estimations. Since it is tool for planning, it also acts as tool for controlling. Preparation of budgets, cost analysis, tax planning, auditing are some of the functions of accounting.

Self Assessment Questions:

4. Accounting is a tool for _______________ and ________

5. Expand SEBI.

6. Mention any five stakeholders.

1.5 Distinction between Book-keeping and Accounting

Accountancy is the profession and the practitioners of accountancy are called accountants. Book keeping is the basic activity of recording. On recording the transactions and events in the books of accounts, accounting does the role of analysis and reporting. Accountancy is the profession of carrying the activities of book keeping and accounting. Accounting enjoys wider scope and includes not only book keeping but also analysis, interpretation and reporting of financial information. The later part of

Page 6: smu account assignment solved

accounting is the core function of accounting. In the present day environment, sophisticated software packages are available, which facilitate entry of transactions and preparation of ledger accounts.

Book keeping Accounting

· It is a process of identifying, measuring, recording and analyzing the transactions in books of accounts

· It involves summarizing the classified transaction, interpreting the analyzed results and communicating the information to the users of financial statement.

· Adopt principles of accounting for recording

· Analyzing and interpreting requires skill, knowledge and experience

· Book keeping is the first stage of accounting process

· Accounting follows book keeping. It is the secondary stage

· The objective is to prepare final accounts and balance sheet in a systematic manner at the end of accounting period

· The objective is to ascertain net results of financial operations and communicate the results to all stakeholders in a manner they understand.

· Accounts executives who perform this function may not require higher level of knowledge.

· Accountants who perform this function need higher analytical skills to interpret the data and to take appropriate decisions.

· The nature of job is routine and clerical

· The nature of job is non routine but analytical.

1.9 Users of Accounting Information

Accounting reports are designed to meet the common information needs of most decision makers. These decisions include when to buy, hold or sell the enterprise shares. It assesses the ability of the enterprise to pay its employees, determine distributable profits and regulate the activities of the enterprise. Investors and lenders are the most obvious users of accounting information.

a) Investors: Investors may be broadly classified as retail investors, high net worth individuals, Institutional investors both domestic and foreign. As chief provider of risk capital, investors are keen to know both the return from their investments and the associated risk. Potential investors need information to judge prospects for their investments.

b) Lenders: Banks, Financial Institutions and debenture holders are the main lenders and they need information about the financial stability of the borrower enterprise. They are interested in information that would enable them to determine whether their borrower has the capability to repay the loans along with the interest due on it. They also use the information for monitoring the financial condition of the borrowers. They may stipulate certain restrictions (known as covenants) such as upper limit on the total debt borrowed from all sources or ask for additional security etc. Short term lenders (trade creditors) who provide short term financial support need

Page 7: smu account assignment solved

information to determine whether the amount owing to them will be paid when due and whether they should extend, maintain or restrict the flow of credit.

c) Regulators, Rating Agencies and Security Analyst: Investors and creditors seek the assistance of information specialist in assessing prospective returns. Equity analyst, bond analyst and credit rating agencies offer a wide range of information in the form of answering queries on television shows, providing trends in business newspapers on a particular stock, offer valuable information in seminars, discussion groups, meetings and interviews. Security analyst obtain valuable information including insider information by means of face-to-face meetings with the company officials, visit their premises and make constant enquiry using e-mails, teleconference and video conference. Firms build a good rapport with such type of information seekers to gain visibility in the market.

d) Management: Management needs information to review the firm’s short term solvency and long term solvency. It has to ensure effective utilization of its resources, profitability in terms of turnover and investment. It has to decide upon the course of action to be taken in future. Management may also be interested in acquiring other business which is undervalued. When managers receive a commission or bonus related to profit or other accounting measures, they have a natural interest in understanding how those numbers are computed. Further when faced with a hostile takeover attempt, they communicate additional financial information with a view to boosting the firm’s stock price.

e) Employees, Trade Union and Tax authorities: Employees are keen to know about the general health of the organization in terms of stability and profitability. Current employees have a natural interest in the financial condition of the firm as their compensation will depend on the financial performance of the firm. Potential employees may use financial information to find out the future prospects of the firm. Trade unions use financial reports for negotiating wage package, declaration of bonus and other benefits. Tax authorities need information to assess the tax liability of the firm.

f) Customers: Customers have an interest in the accounting information about the continuation of company especially when they have established a long term involvement with or are dependent on the company. For Eg. Car owners, buyers of white goods, electronic gadgets, depend on the manufacturer for warranty service support, continued supply of spare parts. The sales of Matiz car was badly affected due to the abrupt closure of Daewoo Motors.

g) Government and regulatory agencies: Government and the regulatory agencies require information to obtain timely and correct information, to regulate the activities of the enterprise if any. They seek information when tax laws need to be amended, to provide institutional support to the lagging industries. The regulatory agencies use financial reports to take action against the firm when appropriate returns are not filed in time or when the returns fails to provide true and fair position of the business or to take appropriate action against the firm when complaints / misappropriation are being lodged. Stock exchange has a legitimate interest in financial reports of publicly held enterprise to ensure efficient operation of capital market.

Page 8: smu account assignment solved

h) The Public: Every firm has a social responsibility. Firms depend on local economy to meet their varied needs. They may get patronage from local government in the form of capital subsidy, cheap land or tax sops in the form of tax holidays for certain period of time. Prosperity of the enterprise may lead to prosperity of the economy both directly and indirectly. Growth in software industry in Bangalore, Karnataka State, led to boom in housing sector, education sector, entertainment sector, travel sector and tourism sector in and around Bangalore. Published financial statement assist public by providing information about the trends and recent developments of the firm.

Self Assessment Questions

7. ________ as chief provider of risk capital is keen to understand both the return from their investments and the associated risk.

8. _________ use financial reports for negotiating wage package, declaration of bonus and other benefits.

9. ___________ has a legitimate interest in financial reports of publicly held enterprise to ensure efficient operation of capital market.

10. The regulatory agencies use _____________ to take action against the firm when appropriate returns are not filed in time or when the returns fails to provide true and fair position of the business or to take appropriate action against the firm when complaints / misappropriation are being lodged.

1.7 Limitations of Accounting

1) Though accounting system is the only source for extracting financial information of the firm, it grossly lacks qualitative elements. Qualitative resources could include leadership of top brass, highly talented human resource, highly motivated team, best products, the power of resource and development, brand image etc.

2) Accounting is not free from bias. The accountants have some leeway or freedom on the methods of depreciation charged, inventory valuation etc. Though the convention says consistency has to be maintained on the policies adopted, there is considerable room for bias, favourism and personal judgment.

Page 9: smu account assignment solved

3) Accounting reveals the estimated position and not the real position of the firm. Generally financial statements are prepared on separate entity concept, conservatism concept etc. which are based on the estimates that may lead to over valuation or under valuation of assets and liabilities. The exact picture of the financial situation can be ascertained only on the liquidation of an enterprise.

4) Accounting ignores the price level changes when financial statements are prepared on historical cost. Fixed assets are shown in the balance sheet at historical cost less accumulated depreciation and not at their replacement value. Land value is shown at historical cost but the replacement value could be far higher than the value stated in the balance sheet due to appreciation of land value over the period of time.

5) The danger of window dressing arises when the management decides to incorporate wrong figures to artificially inflate revenue or deflate losses or when there is a threat of hostile takeover. In such a situation the management fails to provide true and fair view of the financial position to the various users of the financial statement. Satyam Computer Services, the fourth largest software firm went into bust when the information on inflated income to the extent of Rs.7000 crore was revealed.

Self Assessment Questions

11. Accounting grossly lacks ____________elements

12. The exact picture of the financial situation can be ascertained only on the ________of an enterprise.

13. The danger of ___________ arises when the management decides to incorporate wrong figures to artificially inflate revenue or deflate losses or when there is a threat of hostile takeover.

14. Accounting ignores the price level changes when financial statements are prepared on __________.

1.8 Basic Terminologies

To understand the subject, proper understanding of the following terms is essential.

1. Transaction: It is transfer of money or goods or service from one person or account to another person or account. There are cash transactions, credit transactions and paper transactions. In all cash transactions, cash is paid or received immediately. Credit transaction is one where there is a promise to pay/receive cash at a future date. Paper transaction is one where there is no cash inflow or outflow but adjustment is made in the records only. (Bad debts of previous year are written off; depreciation provided on fixed assets etc.),

2. Capital: Funds brought in to start business, by the owner/s. In the case of a company, capital is collected by issue of shares. Capital used to purchase fixed assets is called fixed capital and

Page 10: smu account assignment solved

that capital used for day to day affairs of business is known as working capital. From business point of view, Capital is a liability.

3. Share: A share in a company is one of the units into which the total capital of the company is divided.

4. Assets: An asset is a resources legally owned by the enterprise as a result of past events and from which future economic benefits are expected to flow to the enterprise. Eg: Land and buildings, plant and machinery, furniture and fixtures, cash in hand and at bank, debtors and stock etc., are regarded as assets, Assets may be fixed, current, liquid or fictitious.

5. Fixed assets are those which are held for use in the production or supply of goods and services. Ex: plant and machinery, which is used fairly for long period.

6. Current assets are those which are held or receivable within a year or within the operating cycle of the business. They are intended to be converted into cash within a short period of time. Ex: Stock in trade, debtors, bills receivable, cash at bank etc.,

7. Liquid assets are those which can be easily converted into cash and for instance, cash in hand, cash at bank, marketable investments etc.,

8. Fictitious assets are in the form of such expenses which could not be written off during the period of their incidence. For example, promotional expenses of a company which could not be treated as expenditure in the year of incidence are shown as fictitious asset.

9. Liability: It is a financial obligation of an enterprise arising from past event the settlement of which is expected to result in an outflow of resources embodying economic benefit. Eg. Loans payable, salaries payable, term loans.

10. Current liability is that obligation which has to be satisfied within a year. For example, payment to be made sundry creditors for the goods supplied by them on credit; bills payable accepted by the businessman; overdraft raised by the businessman in a bank etc.

11. Equity: Equity is the residual interest in the asset of the enterprise after deducting all its liabilities. The equity of a company is called shareholders’ equity. Its components include share capital, share premium and retained earnings.

12. Entity: It is an economic unit that performs economic activities.

13. Sole trader: A single individual carrying on business with or without the help of his kith and kin is called sole trader.

14. Partnership: It is a relationship between partners to contribute capital to start business, agree to distribute profits and losses in an agreed proportion and the business being carried on by all or any one acting for all. Partnership firm refers to business where as the partnership refers to relationship caused by agreement.

Page 11: smu account assignment solved

15. Joint Stock Company: It is an organization, for which the capital is contributed by shareholders to carry on business and it is registered under Companies Act and it has a legal entity, having perpetual existence and a common seal.

16. Goods: Goods refer to merchandise, commodities, products, articles or things in which a trader deals. It is the commodities or things meant for resale. Goods account is divided into six heads viz: purchase account, sales account, purchase return account, sales return account, opening stock account and closing stock account. Let us get the meaning of each one.

· Purchase: Goods purchased by a business are called purchase.

· Sales: Goods sold by a business are called sales.

· Purchase Return or Return Outward: Goods returned by the business to its suppliers out of the purchases already made from them are called purchase return.

· Sales Return or Return Outward: Goods returned to a business by its customers out of the sales already made to them are called Sales Return.

· Opening Stock: Unsold goods lying in a business at the beginning of a year, are called opening stock.

· Closing Stock: Unsold goods lying in a business at the end of a year, are called closing stock.

17. Inventory: Inventory refers to goods held by a business for sale in the ordinary course of business or for consumption in the production of goods or service for sale. It includes stock of raw materials, stock of work in – progress and stock of finished goods.

18. Drawings: It refers to cash, goods or any other asset withdrawn by the proprietor from his business for his personal or domestic use. In short, amounts the owner withdraws from his business for living and personal expenses.

19. Debtor: A debtor is a person who owes money to the business. A debtor may be of 4 types.

· Trade debtor is a person who owes money to the business for the goods supplied to him on credit.

· A loan debtor is a person who owes money to the business for the loan advanced to him.

· Debtor for asset sold is a debtor who owes money to the business for any asset sold to him on credit.

· A debtor for service rendered is a debtor who owes money to the business for the service rendered to him on credit.

Page 12: smu account assignment solved

20. Debt: the amount due from a debtor to the business is called a “Debt”, generally debt may be of three types:

· Good debt refers to fully recoverable debt.

· Bad debt refers to debt, which is not recoverable (irrecoverable).

· Doubtful debt refers to debt whose recovery is doubtful.

21. Creditors: A creditor is a person to whom the business owes money. A creditor also may be of 4 types.

· Trade creditor is a person to whom the business owes money for goods purchased from him on credit.

· Loan creditor is a person to whom the business owes money for the loan borrowed from him.

· Creditor for asset purchased is a creditor to whom the business owes money for any asset purchased from him on credit.

· Expenses creditor refers to a creditor to whom the business owes money for any service received from him on credit. For e.g.: salaries unpaid, commission unpaid etc.

22. Loss: It refers to money or money’s worth given up without any benefit in return. For e.g. loss of cash by theft, loss of goods by fire etc. it is a situation where in the expenses of the business exceeds revenues. An expense brings some benefits, but loss does not bring any benefit.

23. Profit: It is a situation where the revenue of a business exceeds its expenses. In other words, the amounts we earned were greater than our expenses.

24. Journal: A journal is a daily record of business transactions. It is a book of original, prime or first entry in which all the business transactions are first entered in the specified manner in the order of dates. A preliminary record where business transaction is first entered into the accounting system.

25. Ledger: A ledger is an account book in which all the accounts are maintained. It is the books of final entry as well as principal book of accounts.

26. Entry: It is the record of a transaction made in any book of account, either in the book of original entry or in the books of final entry.

27. Narration: It is a brief explanation to a journal entry, given below the journal entry, with in brackets. It gives the explanation for the particular journal entry.

28. Posting: Posting is the process of entering in the ledger the information already recorded in the journal or in any of the subsidiary books. In other words process of transferring balances

Page 13: smu account assignment solved

from bookkeeping records called journals to a "final" bookkeeping record called the general ledger.

29. Voucher: It refers to any written document in support of a financial transaction.

30. Trial Balance: A worksheet listing of all the accounts appearing in the general ledger with the dollar amount of the debit or credit balance of each, used to make sure the books are "in balance" total debits and credits are equal.

31. Balance Sheet: It is the financial statement, which shows the amount and nature of business assets, liabilities, and owner’s equity as of a specific point in time. It is also known as a Statement of Financial Position or a Statement of Financial Condition.

32. Carried Forward: The term carried forward or its abbreviation [c/f] is used at the foot of a page to indicate that the total amount at the foot of that page has been carried forward to the head of the next page.

33. Brought Forward: The term brought forward or its abbreviation [b/f] is used at the head of page to indicate that the total amount at the head of that page has been brought forward from the foot of the previous page.

34. Carried Down: The term carried down or its abbreviation [c/d] is written in a ledger account at the time of its closing to indicate that the balance in that account has been carried down to the next period.

35. Brought Down: The term brought down or its abbreviation b/d is written in a ledger account at the time of its opening to indicate that the opening balance in that account has been brought down from the previous period.

36. Bill of exchange: It is documentary evidence in writing containing an unconditional order signed by the maker, directing a certain person to pay a certain sum of money only to, or to the order of, a certain person or the bearer of the instrument.

37. Bills Payable: It is a bill of exchange stating an obligation to pay a certain sum of money at a specified date. In case of purchase of raw materials on credit the supplier or the creditor draws bills of exchange on the business entity. When the entity accepts the bill it becomes bills payable for the entity. The same bill for the supplier is termed as bills receivable.

38. Bills Receivable: It is a bill of exchange containing an acceptance from the drawee (or Payee) a certain sum of money at a specified date. On sale of goods on credit the entity draws a bill of exchange on the customer. When the customer or debtor accepts the bill it becomes bills receivable for the firm. Bills receivables can be discounted with banks or discount houses.

1.9 Summary

Page 14: smu account assignment solved

Accounting is the process of identifying the transactions and events, measuring the transactions and events in terms of money, recording them in a systematic manner in the books of accounts, classifying or grouping them and finally summarizing the transactions in a manner useful to the users of accounting information.

The main objective of accounting is to determine income, financial reporting and disclosure of relevant and pertinent information to the users of financial information.

The users of accounting information are investors, lenders, regulators, rating agencies, security analysts, management, employees, trade unions, tax authorities, customers, government and the general public.

Accounting ignores qualitative aspects while providing information. It is not free from bias. It ignores price level changes and pose the danger of window dressing. Management accounting refers to the use of financial data for the purpose of planning and decision making, performance evaluation etc.

1.10 Terminal Questions

1. Explain the process involved in accounting.

2. What are the objectives of accounting?

3. Distinction between book-keeping and accountancy.

4. How accounting information is used by investors and lenders?

5. How Government and Regulatory agencies use accounting information to regulate the activities of the firm?

6. Distinguish between financial accounting and management accounting

1.11 Answers to SAQ’s and TQ’s

1. Identifies, measures

2. Summarizing, analyzing

3. Accounting

4. Effective planning, controlling

5. Securities Exchange Board of India

11. Qualitative

12. Liquidation

13. Window dressing

14. Historical Cost

Page 15: smu account assignment solved

6. Shareholders, Creditors, Bankers, Government, Employees

7. Investors

8. Trade Union

9. Stock Exchange

10. Financial Reports

Answers to Terminal Questions

1. Refer 1.3

2. Refer 1.4

3. Refer 1.5

4. Refer 1.6

5. Refer 1.6

6. Refer 1.8

Page 16: smu account assignment solved

MB0041-Unit-02-Accounting Concepts, Principles, Bases and Policies

Unit-02-Accounting Concepts, Principles, Bases and Policies

Structure:

2.1 Introduction

Objectives

2.2 Accounting Concepts, Principles, Policies and Standards

2.3 Types of accounting concepts

Business Separate entity concept

Going concern concept

Money measurement concept

Periodicity concept

Accrual concept

2.4 Accounting Principles

Principle of Income recognition

Principle of expense

Principle of matching cost and revenue

Principle of Historical costs

Principle of full disclosure

Double aspect principle

Modifying Principle

Principle of materiality

Principle of consistency

Principle of conservatism or prudence

Page 17: smu account assignment solved

2.5 Accounting Policies

Changes in Accounting Policies

Disclosure in case of changes in Accounting Policies

2.6 Accounting Standards

Scope and functions of Accounting Standards Board

International Financial Reporting System

2.7 Summary

2.8 Terminal Questions

2.9 Answers

Annexures – I and II

2.1 Introduction

In the previous unit we had discussed on the meaning, objectives of accounting, the accounting process involved and the distinction between book keeping and accounting. Accounting is a reflection of all business transactions expressed in terms of money pertaining to a definite period of time. The objective of accounting is to find out profit or loss arising out of transactions and finally to judge the financial position of the business organization.

Accounting is based on certain postulates, concepts and policies. In this Unit, we have dealt with various types of concepts, principles and policies of accounting with suitable examples. A brief introduction is made on accounting standards issued by Accounting Standards Board of ICAI and International Financial Reporting System (IFRS).

Objectives:

After going through this unit, you should be able to:

1. Define the meaning of concepts, principles and policies

2. Explain the different types of accounting concepts

3. Explain the different types of accounting principles.

4. Explain the major consideration governing accounting policies, changes in accounting policies and the disclosure if there is change in accounting policies.

Page 18: smu account assignment solved

5. Define the scope and functions of Accounting Standards

6. State the meaning and objectives of International Financial Reporting System.

2.2 Meaning of Accounting Principles, Concepts & Policies

Accounting information is used by various stakeholders. Since all the stakeholders should understand the accounting language in the same sense, certain principles, concepts and policies of accounting have been laid down.

Accounting Principles: Accounting Principles are basically the rules of action adopted by the accountants universally while recording accounting transactions. The principles are doctrines associated with theory and procedures and current practices of accounting. These principles may be classified as concepts and conventions.

Concepts: Concepts take the form of assumptions or conditions, which guide the accountants while preparing accounting statements.

Based on this assumption, business person purchases fixed assets, uses long term source to fund the fixed assets etc. This strong assumption that the business will continue for a long period of time is called a concept.

Conventions: Conventions are those customs and traditions which guide the accountants while preparing the financial statements.

Accounting Policy: Accounting policy refers to the specific accounting principles and methods of applying those principles adopted by the enterprise in the preparation and presentation of financial statements.

Page 19: smu account assignment solved

The choice of selecting straight line method of depreciation or any other is the policy of the management. No management can exercise discretion regarding fundamental presumptions of accounting. But every management has a choice of making an accounting policy.

Generally Accepted Accounting Principles:

The double entry system of accounting is based on a set of principles which are called generally accepted accounting principles. It incorporates the consensus at a particular time as to:

· Which economic resources and obligations should be recorded as assets and liabilities by financial accounting,

· Which changes in assets and liabilities should be recorded,

· When these changes are to be recorded,

· How the assets and liabilities and changes in them should be measured,

· What information should be disclosed and

· Which financial statement should be prepared

For example, an entity having research and development department may follow the policy of deducting all the R&D expenses incurred in a year as revenue expense while for the same situation another entity may classify R&D expenses into projects and may write off only when the project is not expected to offer any future benefits.

Annexure 1 given at the end of this unit provides you details on the difference between US GAAP norms and Indian GAAP norms.

Accounting Standards

To bring uniformity in terminology, accounting concepts, conventions, and assumptions, the Institute of Chartered Accountants of India (ICAI) established Accounting Standards Board (ASB) in 1977. An Accounting Standard is a selected set of accounting policies or broad guidelines regarding the principles and methods to be chosen out of several alternatives. There are altogether 32 accounting standards issued by ASB out of which, one standard (AS8) has been withdrawn pursuant to AS26 becoming mandatory. Annexure 2 given at the end of this unit provides you the details of 32 Accounting Standards (AS).

Self Assessment Questions:

1. Accounting principles are _______, associated with theory and practice of accountings.

Page 20: smu account assignment solved

2. Accounting Principles are classified as ________ and ________.

3. Assets may be depreciated on fixed installment method or reducing balance method. Is it a concept or a convention?

4. A business is started with an assumption of making profit. Is this assumption, a concept or a convention?

5. The purpose of establishing ICAI and ASB is to ________.

6. How many accounting standards are issued by ASB so far?

2.3 Types of Accounting Concepts

As said earlier, concepts are the basic assumptions or conditions upon which the science of accounting is based. There are five basic concepts of accounting, namely – business entity concept, which is also termed as separate entity concept, going concern concept, money measurement concept, periodicity concept and accrual concept. Each concept is discussed below.

2.3.1 Business Separate Entity Concept

The essence of this concept is that business is a separate entity and it is different from the owner or the proprietor. It is an economic unit which owns its assets and has its own obligations. This enables the business to segregate the transactions of the company from the private transactions of the proprietor(s).

This legal separation between business and ownership is kept in mind while recording the transactions in the books of business.

Self Assessment Questions:

7. State true or false:

1. If the household expenses of Rs 25,000 of a proprietor are shown as business expenses, the profit of the business will be understated to the extent of Rs.25,000.

Page 21: smu account assignment solved

2. If a proprietor invests Rs.1,00,000 in the business, it is deemed that the proprietor has given Rs.1,00,000 to the ‘business’ and it is shown as an asset in the books of the business.

8. Business and its owner are _______________ entities.

9. Profits earned in business form an addition to the _____________ of the owner.

2.3.2 Going concern concept

The fundamental assumption is that the business entity will continue fairly for a long time to come. There is no reason why an enterprise should be promoted for a short period only to liquidate the business in the foreseeable future. This assumption is called “going concern concept”.

This concept forms the basis for the distinction between expenditure that will yield benefit over a long period of time (Fixed Assets) and expenditure whose benefit will be exhausted in the short term (Current Asset). Similarly liabilities are classified as short term liabilities and long term liabilities.

According to AS 1 issued by ICAI, if this concept is followed, this fact need not be disclosed in the financial statement since its acceptance and uses are assumed. In case this concept is not followed, the fact should be disclosed in the financial statement along with the reasons.

Self Assessment Questions:

10. Accounting of a small calculator as an expense and not as an asset is the application of principles of prudency. State true or false.

11. Classification of assets as current and fixed assets is the application of going concern concept. State true or false.

12. Purchase a building for your business is made under the assumption that it would last for a long period. This is in accordance with the materiality principle. State true or false.

13. What is the underlying intention in making a provision every year when an asset is purchased?

2.3.3 Money Measurement Concept

Page 22: smu account assignment solved

All transactions of a business are recorded in terms of money. An event or a transaction that cannot be expressed in money terms, cannot be accounted in the books of accounts.

Self Assessment Questions:

14. An event or a transaction expressed in monetary value is measured but inflation or changes in the purchasing power are ignored in money measurement concept. Say yes or no.

15. Transactions or events should be expressed in ___________.

16. Revenues are matched with expense in accordance with money measurement principle. State true or false

2.3.4 Periodicity Concept

The time interval for which accounts are prepared is an important factor even though we assume long life for a business.

The accounting period could be half year or even a quarter. The financial statements should be prepared at the end of each accounting period so that income statement shows profit or loss for that accounting period. So also a balance sheet is prepared to depict the financial position of the business.

Self Assessment Questions:

17. The economic life of the entity is artificially split into periodic intervals in accordance with periodicity concept. State true or false

18. The accounting data must disclose all relevant information in accordance with periodicity concept. State true or false

Page 23: smu account assignment solved

19. The accountants are free to submit financial statement at arbitrary points in time during the life of the entity. This is in accordance with periodicity concept. State true or false.

2.3.5 Accrual Concept

Profit earned or loss suffered for an accounting period is the result of both cash and credit transactions. It is possible that certain incomes are earned but not received and similarly certain expenses incurred but not yet paid during an accounting period. But it is relevant to consider them while computing the financial results just because they are related to the specific accounting period.

Similarly the expenses that are incurred for the accounting period could be paid after the accounting period. Such accrued expenses are deducted while calculating the profit for the accounting period. This is the accrual concept.

Self Assessment Questions:

20. Interest earned but not received within an accounting period is called _______.

21. Following straight line method of depreciation of a particular asset year after year adhere to consistency concept. State true or false.

22. Accrued income should be _________ to compute profit and prepaid expenses should be _____ according to accrual concept of accounting.

23. Accrual concept considers not only cash transactions but also ______ transactions.

2.4 Accounting Principles

Accounting Principles are the rules basing on which accounting takes place and these rules are universally accepted.

Page 24: smu account assignment solved

There are ten such basic principles, namely principle of income recognition, principle of expense, principle of matching cost and revenue, historical cost principle, principle of full disclosure, double aspect principle, modifying principle, principle of materiality, principle of consistency and principle of conservatism. A brief description is in the following paragraphs.

2.4.1 Principle of Income Recognition

According to this concept, revenue is considered as being earned on the date on which it is realized, i.e., the date on which goods and services are transferred to customers for cash or for promise. It should further be noted that it is the amount which the customers are expected to pay which shall be recorded. In effect, only revenue which is actually realized should be taken to profit and loss account. Unrealized revenue should not be taken into consideration for determining the profit. Example:

Self Assessment Questions:

24. Income is considered as earned only when it is ____________.

25. Income is realized whether it is actually received in cash or promised to be received. Is it True or False?

26. Income realized is different from cash received. Is it true or false?

27. A sale is made on credit. Does it constitute income realization?

28. An order is received for sale of goods. Is it realization of income?

29. An order is received with an advance of Rs.100000 cash. Can this be called income?

2.4.2 Principle of Expense

Expenses are different from payments. A payment becomes expenditure or an expense only when such payment is revenue in nature and made for consideration.

Therefore all revenue expenses are transferred to profit and loss account to ascertain profit or loss of the business undertaking. In other words, there are revenue expenses and capital

Page 25: smu account assignment solved

expenses. While revenue expenses are charged against profit, capital expenses are shown in the balance sheet as assets.

Self Assessment Questions:

30. A cash payment may be a revenue payment or capital payment. Is it true or false?

31. A payment which is revenue in nature is expenditure. Is it true or false?

32. Plant is purchased and payment is made. Is it an expenditure or acquisition of asset?

33. All revenue expenses are charged against ___________.

34. Capital payments resulting in acquisition of assets appear in the balance sheet. True or False?

2.4.3 Principle of Matching Cost and Revenue

Revenue earned during a period is compared with the expenditure incurred to earn that income, whether the expenditure is paid during that period or not. This is matching cost and revenue principle, which is important to find out the profit earned for that period. Here costs are reported as expenses in the accounting period in which the revenue associated with those costs is reported.

While preparing the final accounts adjustments are made for outstanding expenses, prepaid expenses, outstanding income and income received in advance.

Self Assessment Questions:

35. Matching concept of accounting considers only revenue incomes and expenses relating to a particular accounting period. True or False?

36. Incomes and expenses for an accounting period are considered to compute _____.

37. Expenditure paid or payable and revenue earned whether realised or not in cash are taken into account to find out profit or loss. True or False?

38. For the actual revenue received, outstanding incomes are ________ and income received in advance are_________________ to find out the revenue income for the given period.

39. For the actual revenue expenses (costs) paid during the accounting period, outstanding expenses are _____ and prepaid expenses are _____ to find out expenses for the accounting period.

Page 26: smu account assignment solved

2.4.4 Principle of Historical Costs

This is called ‘cost’ principle. All assets are recorded at the cost of acquisition and this cost is the basis for all subsequent accounting for the assets. The expenses and the goods purchased are shown at the value at which they are incurred. The value of the assets is constantly reduced by charging depreciation against their cost to present their book value in the balance sheet.

However, on account of inflationary situations, this cost concept does not portray correct picture of the business and so inflation accounting has emerged.

Self Assessment Questions:

40. All assets are shown at historical cost in balance sheet. True or False?

41. Depreciation is charged against the historical cost of assets. True or False?

42. Historical cost is the cost at which an asset is actually purchased. True or False?

43. Machinery is bought for Rs.200000 and its market value is Rs.80000. Which of these values do you consider to mention in the balance sheet according to cost principle?

44. Inflation accounting has emerged as a result of limitation of historical cost concept. True or False?

2.4.5 Principle of Full Disclosure

The business enterprise should disclose relevant information to all the parties concerned with the organization. It means that any information of substance or of interest to the average investors will have to be disclosed in the financial statements.

The Companies Act, 1956 requires that income statement and balance sheet of a company must give a fair and true view of the state of affairs of the company.

Self Assessment Questions:

45. The principle of full disclosure implies that information which is of ___________ should be stated in financial statements.

Page 27: smu account assignment solved

46. The material information that is disclosed should be of great interest to the average investors. True or False?

47. Non-disclosure of material information amounts to ___________.

48. Disclosing about assets without disclosing about liabilities is against the principle of full disclosure. True or False?

2.4.6 Double Aspect Principle

This concept is the most fundamental one for accounting. A business entity is an independent unit and it receives benefits from some and gives benefits to some other. Benefit received and benefit given should always match and balance.

The total liabilities are equal to the total of assets. This is dual aspect of accounting. The established principle of accounting is that for every debit there is an equivalent credit and this is called double entry principle of accounting.

Self Assessment Questions:

49. Under dual aspect principle, total benefits received by business should match with total benefits given. True or False?

50. Total liabilities should be equal to ___________ as per dual aspect principle.

51. For every debit, there should be an equivalent credit. This is called _________ of accounting.

2.4.7 Modifying Principle

The modifying principle states that the cost of applying a principle should not be more than the benefit derived from. If the cost is more than the benefit, then that principle should be modified. This is called cost-benefit principle. There should be flexibility in adopting a principle and the advantage out of the principle should over weigh the cost of implementing the principle.

Self Assessment Questions:

52. Modifying principle is also known as _____________.

53. The modifying principles states that benefit derived should over weigh the cost of implementing it. State true or False?

Page 28: smu account assignment solved

54. A firm plans to establish costing department. By doing so it was estimated that the cost of the product would increase by 50%. Is it advisable to have cost-department?

2.4.8 Principle of Materiality

While important details of financial status must be informed to all relevant parties, insignificant facts which do not influence any decisions of the investors or any interested group, need not be communicated. Such less significant facts are not regarded as material facts. What is material and what is not material depends upon the nature of information and the party to whom the information is provided. While income has to be shown for income tax purposes, the amount can be rounded off to the nearest ten and fraction does not matter. The statement of account sent to a debtor contains all the details regarding invoices raised, amount outstanding during a particular period. The information on debtors furnished to Registrar of Companies need not be in detail.

Self Assessment Questions:

55. Principle of materiality states that relevant information should be given to relevant parties. True or False?

56. Details of debtors should be given to creditors. True or False?

57. The material information to one party need not be so for another party. True or False?

58. The method of depreciation adopted should be disclosed to Income Tax Authorities. True or False?

2.4.9 Principle of Consistency

Consistency is required to help comparison of financial data from one period to another. Once a method of accounting is adopted, it should not be changed. For instance if stock is valued under FIFO method in first year it should be valued under the same method in the subsequent years also. Likewise if the firm chooses to depreciate assets under diminishing balance method, it should continue to do so year after year, unless the management takes a policy decision to change the depreciation method. Any change in the accounting methods should be informed to the concerned authorities with justification.

Self Assessment Questions:

59. The purpose of principle of consistency is to help for ______ from one period to another period.

60. Consistency principle helps for proper assessment of profit or loss. True or False?

2.4.10 Principle of Conservatism or Prudence

Page 29: smu account assignment solved

Accountants follow the rule “anticipate no profits but provide for all anticipated losses “. Whenever risk is anticipated sufficient provision should be made. The value of investments is normally taken at cost, even if the market value is higher than the cost. If the market value expected is lower than the cost, then provision should be made by charging profit and creating investment fluctuation fund. This is the principle of conservatism and it does not mean that the income or the value of assets should be intentionally under stated.

Self Assessment Questions:

61. Provision should be made whenever _____________ is anticipated.

62. The underlying spirit of principle of conservatism is __________ .

63. State the name of the relevant accounting principles for the following statements.

a. Following FIFO method of stock valuation year after year

b. Appending notes to the financial statements.

c. Anticipate no profit but provide for all probable losses

2.5 Accounting Policies

It refers to specific accounting principles and methods of accounting adopted by the enterprise while preparing and presenting the financial statements. The management of each enterprise has to select appropriate accounting policies based on the nature and circumstances of the business they are in. Some of the areas in which different accounting policies may be adopted are:

· Methods of depreciation, amortization,

· Treatment of expenditure during construction,

· Conversion or translation of foreign currency items,

· Valuation of inventories,

· Treatment of goodwill,

· Valuation of investments,

· Treatment of retirement benefits,

· Recognition of profit on long-term contract,

· Valuation of fixed assets and

Page 30: smu account assignment solved

· Treatment of contingent liabilities.

The major considerations governing the selection and application of accounting policies are:

a. Prudence: Uncertainties are a fact and it is inevitable. This should be recognized by exercising prudence in preparing financial statements.

b. Substance Over form: Transactions and events should be accounted for and presented in accordance with their substance and financial reality and not merely with their legal form.

c. Materiality: Financial statement should disclose all material items which might influence the decision of the users of the financial statement.

2.5.1 Change in Accounting Policies:

The change in accounting policy is recommended only in the following circumstances:

a. If it is required by statute for compliance with an accounting standard

b. If is considered that the change would result in a more appropriate presentation of the financial statements of an enterprise.

2.5.2 Disclosure in case of change in Accounting Policy:

· If change has a material effect in current period and the effect of change is ascertainable the amount of change should be disclosed.

· If the change has a material effect in current period and the effect of change is not ascertainable wholly or in part, the fact should be disclosed.

· If change has no material effect in current period but which is reasonably accepted to have a material effect in later periods, the fact of such change should be appropriately disclosed.

2.6 Accounting Standards

It is a selected set of accounting policies or broad guidelines regarding the principles and methods to be chosen out of several alternatives. Standards adhere to certain laws, customs, usage and business environment in which it operates.

The basic purpose of accounting standards is to harmonize the diverse accounting policies and practices that are currently used in India. The adoption of accounting standards ensures uniformity, comparability and qualitative improvement in the preparation and presentation of financial statement. Accounting standards facilitates more disclosure of financial information that is beyond the statutory limits.

Page 31: smu account assignment solved

2.6.1 Scope and functions of Accounting Standard Board

The Accounting standards board (ASB) was constituted by The Institute of chartered Accountants of India on 21st April, 1977. The aim of the board was to bring in uniformity among various accounting policies and practices that were practiced in India.

To determine the broad areas in which accounting standards need to be formulated and hold a dialogue with various representatives of the government, industry and other organization to ascertain their views. On the basis of the discussions they hold, the board prepares and issues a draft proposal for comments by the members of the Institute and the public.

After modification (if any) in the draft proposal a final draft is submitted to the council of the institute. The accounting standard will then be issued under the authority of the Council. At present there are 30 accounting standards issued by the Council.

2.6.2 International Financial Reporting System:

IFRS are standards, interpretations and framework for the preparation and presentation of financial statements. IFRS was framed by International Accounting Standards Board (IASB).

The objective of financial statement is to provide information about the financial position, performance and changes in the financial position of an entity. It should also provide the current financial status of the entity to all the users of financial information. IFRS follows accrual basis of accounting and the financial statements are prepared on the basis that an entity will continue for the foreseeable future. IFRS helps entities access global capital market with ease.

Under IFRS, we need to submit a statement of financial position (Balance Sheet), Comprehensive income statement (Profit & Loss/ Income and Expenditure account), either a statement of changes in equity or statement of recognized income or expenses, cash flow statement and notes including summary of significant accounting policies.

2.7 Summary

Accounting Principles are basically the rules of action adopted by the accountants universally while recording accounting transactions.

Accounting conventions are those customs and traditions which guide the accountants while preparing the financial statements.

Accounting concepts are the basic assumptions or conditions upon which the science of accounting is based. There are five basic concepts of accounting, namely – business entity concept (separate entity concept), going concern concept, money measurement concept, periodicity concept and accrual concept.

Accounting policy refers to the specific accounting principles and methods of applying those principles adopted by the enterprise in the preparation and presentation of financial statements.

Page 32: smu account assignment solved

Different types of Accounting Principles are Principles of Income recognition, Principles of expense, Principles of matching cost and revenue, Principles of Historical cost, Principle of full disclosure, Principles of double aspects, Modifying Principles, Principles of Materiality, Principles of consistency, and Principles of conservatism or prudence.

An Accounting Standard is a selected set of accounting policies or broad guidelines regarding the principles and methods to be chosen out of several alternatives. There are altogether 28 accounting standards issued by ASB which have to be adopted by management of different enterprises to improve the quality of presentation of financial statements in our country.

2.8 Terminal Questions

1. What are the basic principles of Accountancy?

2. The salaries paid in 2004 Rs.500000; Salaries outstanding Rs.20000; Salaries paid in advance for 2004 Rs.30000; What is the actual salary expenditure for 2004? What is the accounting principle involved in this?

3. What is wrong if assets like buildings are shown at market value in the balance sheet?

4. A business receives capital of Rs.100000 and a loan is raised for Rs.50000. This is represented by cash Rs.15000; Machinery Rs.85000; Furniture Rs.20000 and goods Rs30000. Find the total of debits and credits from business point of view. What principle of accounting is underlying in this case?

5. What is substance over form?

2.9 Answer for Self Assessment Questions

SAQ 1:

1. Doctrines

2. Concepts, conventions

3. Convention

4. Concept

5. Bring uniformity in accounting terminology and principles

6. 32

7. a. True, b. False

20. Accrued interest

21. True

22. Added, deducted

23. Credit

24. Realized

25. True

26. True

27. Yes

28. No

45. Substance

46. True

47. Fraud

48. True

49. True

50. Total Assets

51. Double entry principle

52. Cost-benefit principle

53. True

Page 33: smu account assignment solved

8. separate

9. capital

10. False

11. True

12. False

13. To replace it after a certain period.

14. Yes

15. Monetary value

16. False

17. True

18. False

19. False

29. No

30. True

31. True

32. Asset Acquisition

33. Profit

34. True

35. True

36. Profit or loss

37. True

38. Added, Deducted

39. Added, Deducted

40. True

41. True

42. True

43. Rs.200000

44. True

54. No

55. True

56. False

57. True

58. True

59. Comparison

60. True

61. Risk

62. Anticipate no profit but provide for all anticipated losses

63. a. Principles of consistency

b. Principles of full disclosure

c. Principles of conservatism

Answers for Terminal Question:

1. Income recognition, principle of expense, matching of cost and revenue, historical cost principle, full disclosure principle, double aspect principle, modifying principle, materiality principle, consistency principle and conservatism principle.

2. Rs.490000 (500000 + 20000 – 30000); Matching cost and revenue principle.

3. If assets like building are shown at market value instead of historical cost in the balance sheet, the profit or loss arising out of such valuation is against to the principle of income recognition. The profit or loss is said to arise only when the asset is sold or revalued for a specific purpose. The day when the assets are valued, the market value may be high and later the prices may fall.

Page 34: smu account assignment solved

Therefore it is wrong to consider the unrealized or anticipated profit. Hence the assets should be shown at historical cost in the balance sheet.

4.

It is as per double aspect principle.

5. Refer unit 2.5

ANNEXURE-1

US GAAP INDIAN GAAP

It is established under FASB and AICPA

It is established under ICAI

Balance Sheet, Income Statement & Funds Flow Statement are mandatory

Balance Sheet and income statement are alone mandatory

Any change in foreign exchange fluctuations cannot be capitalized but the difference can be shown or debited to Income statement

Any difference in foreign exchange can be capitalized.

Financial accounting, Management accounting and income tax accounting are prepared separately

Only financial accounting and Income tax accounting are prepared.

The basic tenets is globalization of business

The basic tenet is localization

Any long term loan repayable is the current financial year is shown separately

Long term loans maturing in the current financial year need not be disclosed separately

In lease contract, lessee is more beneficiary because he can claim

In lease contract, lessor is eligible for depreciation allowance and not the

Page 35: smu account assignment solved

depreciation allowance lessee.

It is more transparent and accepted worldwide. More disclosure is required

It is comparatively less transparent. For listing the securities in other country’s stock exchange USGAAP is mandatory

ANNEXURE 2

ACCOUNTING STANDARDS

AS No Title Recommendary or Mandatory

Mandatory from accounting period beginning on or after

AS-1 Disclosure of Accounting Policies

Mandatory 1.4.1991

AS-2 Valuation of Inventories Mandatory 1.4.1999

AS-3 Cash Flow Statement Mandatory 1.4.2000

AS-4 Contingencies and events occurring after the Balance Sheet date (revised)

Mandatory 1.4.1995

AS-5 Prior Period and extraordinary items and changes in Accounting Policies

Mandatory 1.1.1987

AS-6 Depreciation Accounting (revised)

Mandatory 1.4.1995

AS-7 Accounting for construction contracts

Mandatory 1.4.1991

AS-8 Accounting for Research and Development

Mandatory 1.4.1991

Page 36: smu account assignment solved

AS-9 Revenue Recognition Mandatory 1.4.1991

AS-10 Accounting for Fixed Assets

Mandatory 1.4.1991

AS-11 Accounting for the effects of changes in foreign exchange rates (Revised)

Mandatory 1.4.1995

AS-12 Accounting for Government Grants

Mandatory 1.4.1994

AS-13 Accounting for Investment ——– ——-

AS-14 Accounting for Amalgamation

Mandatory 1.4.1995

AS-15 Accounting for retirement benefits in the financial statement of employers

Mandatory 1.4.1995

AS-16 Borrowing Costs Mandatory 1.4.2000

AS-17 Segment Reporting Mandatory 1.4.2001

AS-18 Related party disclosure Mandatory 1.4.2001

AS-19 Leases Mandatory 1.4.2001

AS-20 Earnings Per Share Mandatory 1.4.2001

AS-21 Consolidated financial statement

Mandatory 1.4.2001

AS-22 Accounting for taxes on income

Mandatory 1.4.2001

AS-23 Accounting for investments in associates in consolidated financial statements

Mandatory 1.4.2002

Page 37: smu account assignment solved

AS-24 Discontinuing operations Mandatory 1.4.2002

AS-25 Interim financial reporting Mandatory 1.4.2002

AS-26 Intangible assets Mandatory 1.4.2003

AS-27 Financial reporting of interests in joint venture

Mandatory 1.4.2002

AS-28 Impairment of assets Mandatory 1.4.2004

AS-29 Provisions, Contingent Liabilities & Contingent Assets

Mandatory 1.4.2004

AS-30 Financial Instruments: Recognition, Measurement and Limited Resources

Mandatory from 1.4.2011

1.4.2009

AS-31 Financial Instruments: Presentation

Mandatory from 1.4.2011

1.4.2009

AS-32 Financial Instruments: Disclosure and limited revision to AS 19 (leases)

Mandatory from 1.4.2011

1.4.2009

· AS 8 was withdrawn in pursuant to AS 26 becoming mandatory.

· 29 accounting standards are issued as of date and only 28 is applicable.

· AS 30, 31, 32 are published but they will come into effect from 1.4.2009. It is mandatory on or after 1.4.2011

Copyright © 2009 SMU

Powered by Sikkim Manipal University

.

Page 38: smu account assignment solved

MB0041-Unit-03-Double Entry Accounting

Unit-03-Double Entry Accounting

Structure:

3.1 Introduction

Objectives

3.2 Meaning of double entry accounting

3.3 Classification of accounts under Traditional approach

3.4 Classification of accounts under Accounting Equation approach

3.5 Comparison of traditional approach with Modern approach equal approach

3.6 Accounting Trail

3.7 Transactions and events

3.8 Meaning and roles of debit and credit

3.9 Accounting equation

3.10 Summary

3.11 Terminal Questions

3.12 Answers

3.1 Introduction

In the previous unit we had dealt with different types of accounting principles, concepts, policies and accounting standards. Accounting Principles are basically the rules of action adopted by the accountants universally while recording accounting transactions. Accounting concepts are assumptions which guide the accountant in preparation of financial statements while accounting conventions are customs and traditions followed in preparation of the financial statements.

Page 39: smu account assignment solved

Accounting policies are those concepts and conventions adopted by the management based to the situations but more importantly, consistency is needed while adopting them. Accounting standards is a select set of accounting policies, methods chosen by the firm.

In this unit, we have dealt the meaning of double entry accounting, the classification of accounts under traditional approach and accounting equation approach. This classification is needed because business entity may not be confined to the geographical boundaries of the nation. Accounting trial is a sequential order in which the accounting process flows. The eight process involved in accounting trail is discussed briefly in this unit. Finally a brief explanation of the rules of debit and credit on various types of accounts is dealt.

Finally a brief explanation of the rules of debit and credit on various types of accounts is dealt.

Objectives:

After going through this unit, you should be able to:

1. Define Double entry book keeping.

2. Classify different types of accounts under traditional approach

3. Classify different types of accounts under Accounting equation approach

4. Compare traditional approach with modern approach

5. State the process involved in accounting trail.

6. State the meaning of transactions and events

7. Explain the rules of debit and credit

The students should be able to appreciate the double entry system and know the accounting process.

3.2 Meaning of Double Entry Accounting

We have learnt that the dual aspect recording is the most important accounting concept. According to the concept, every business transaction involves receiving aspect and giving aspect. A transaction is a business activity involving transfer of money or money’s worth.

Double Entry Book-Keeping System:

Every account has two sides:

1) One account is the receiver of the benefit

Page 40: smu account assignment solved

2) Other account is the giver of the benefit.

It must be noted that the amount of benefit received by one account is equal to the amount of benefit given by the other account. This enables us to record the two effects of any busines transaction. If capital is brought in by the owner of the business unit, the owner is the giver of the benefit and the business unit is the receiver of the benefit. It is a liability to the business unit and it is equally balanced by an asset in the business unit, in the form of cash received towards capital. Therefore every liability is represented by an asset. This is also expressed as every debit has an equivalent credit.

Illustration1: We shall consider five transactions and show how they are accounted for in the books of the business.

1. Mr. Abhi brings Rs.100000 cash as capital into his business.

2. He purchases furniture to his shop Rs.10000

3. He buys goods for cash Rs.50000

4. He sells goods worth Rs.30000 for Rs.40000 on credit to Arjun

5. He pays wages to servants Rs.1000

Transaction 1: The business receives capital in cash. Capital is a liability and cash is an asset to the business.

Liability

Asset

Capital 100000 Cash 100000

Transaction 2: Furniture is purchased for cash. This transaction can be reflected as under

Capital 100000 Cash Rs. (100000- 10000) 90000

Furniture 10000

Total 100000 Total 100000

Transaction 3: Purchased of goods for cash. This can be reflected in the statement as under.

Capital 100000 Cash Rs (90000 – 50000) 40000

Page 41: smu account assignment solved

Furniture 10000

Stock of goods 50000

Total 100000 Total 100000

Transaction 4: Sold goods to Arjun on credit for Rs.40000, the cost of which is only Rs. 30000. In this transaction the affected accounts are Goods account, Arjun account and Profit & Loss account. Since the profit belongs to the owner it is fair to add it to the owner’s capital. The effect of this transaction can appear on the statement as shown below:

Capital 100000 Cash 40000

Profit 10000 Furniture 10000 Stock of goods

(50000-30000)20000

Arjun (Debtors) 40000

110000

110000

Transaction 5: Payment of wages Rs.1000.The cash balance gets reduced in the asset side and profit gets reduced as a result of the expenditure (wages account) on the liability side. This changes the statement as shown below:

Capital 100000 Cash (40000 – 1000) 39000

Profit (10000-1000) 9000 Furniture 10000

Stock of goods 20000

Arjun (debtors) 40000

109000

109000

From the above illustrations, it is clear that every transaction has dual effect. Recording these aspects is the fundamental idea behind double entry system of book keeping.

Self Assessment Questions 1:

Page 42: smu account assignment solved

1. The system of recording transactions based on dual aspect concept is called

a) Double account system

b) Double entry system

c) Single entry system

2. Show the dual aspect effect of the following transactions on the assets and liabilities of business.

a. Purchased goods for cash Rs.80000

b. Purchased delivery van on credit for Rs.400000

c. Paid Rs.5000 to a supplier of goods on credit

d. The proprietor withdrew Rs.20000 from the bank account of business for Personal expenses.

3.3 Classification of accounts under Traditional Approach

The identification of the accounts affected in the transactions is a major task. There are three types of accounts, namely personal accounts, real accounts and nominal accounts.

Personal Account Deals with accounts of individuals like creditors, debtors, bank account, outstanding/prepaid accounts

Real Account It represents various asset accounts both tangible and intangible.

Nominal Account It consists of various types of expenses or incomes or loss or profit.

Personal Account:

Real Accounts:

Page 43: smu account assignment solved

Real accounts are those which may be tangible real accounts and intangible real accounts. Tangible real accounts relate to things that can be touched, felt, physically measurable. Building account, furniture account, stock account, cash account etc are tangible real accounts. Intangible real accounts are such that they cannot be seen or touched. They can be measured in terms of money such as goodwill, patent rights etc.

Nominal Accounts:

Nominal accounts are also known as impersonal accounts. They are in the form of expenses or losses, incomes or gains. They do not really exist in physical form, but behind every nominal account cash is involved. For example, salary account is a nominal account and when salary is paid cash goes out and there is nothing in physical form. Therefore salary account is regarded as nominal account. Similarly all expenses and losses and all incomes and gains accounts are regarded as nominal accounts.

3.4 Classification of accounts according to Accounting Equation Approach:

The preparation of financial statements is the objective of accounting. Accounting as an information processing system, should facilitate in the preparation of income statement and balance sheet. This in turn, would require that the terms in the accounting equation should be the summary of all the accounting records from an accounting system.

Accounting equation approach classifies different types of accounts into assets account, liabilities account, capital account, revenue account and expenses account.

Types of Accounts Meaning Examples

Asset account Deals with tangible and intangible real assets.

Land a/c, Building a/c, Plant & Machinery a/c, Cash a/c, Good will a/c, Trademark a/c, Patents a/c, Investments a/c

Liabilities account Deals with the financial obligations of the firm on outsiders.

Long term loans, Debentures, Bank loans, Trade creditors, Outstanding expenses.

Capital account Deals with accounts of the owners of the company

Capital a/c, Drawings a/c

Revenue account Deals with amount charged for goods sold or service rendered, and other incomes.

Sales a/c, Royalty received a/c, interest received a/c, dividend received a/c

Page 44: smu account assignment solved

Expenses account Deals with expenses incurred in the process of earning revenue

Purchases a/c, Discount allowed a/c, Interest paid a/c, Loss by fire a/c.

3.5 Comparison of traditional approach with Modern approach or Accounting Equation approach:

Traditional approach Modern approach

Personal account:

· (other than those relating to owner) having debit balance

· (other than those relating to owners) having credit balance

· Those relating to owners

· Asset a/c

· Liabilities a/c

· Capital a/c

Real account · Asset a/c

Nominal account:

· Relating to expenses

· Relating to revenue

· Expenses a/c

· Revenue a/c

Illustration 2:

Classify the following accounts according to Traditional and Modern approach

1. Capital a/c 2. Drawings a/c 3. Building purchased

4. Purchases account 5. Sales account 6. Carriage inward

7. Carriage outward 8. Cash received 9. Cash paid

10. Interest paid 11. Interest received 12. Commission paid

13.  Comm received 14. Discount allowed 15. Conveyance charges

Page 45: smu account assignment solved

16. Sales promotion exp17.  Entertainment expenses

18. Subscription paid.

19.   Subscription received

20.  Light,Power & Electricity

21. Telephone, postage and telegram

22.  Repairs incurred 23. Insurance premium paid

24. Bad debts written off

25. Bad debts recovered26. Discount received 27. Postage & stationery purchased

28. F&F purchased 29. Bank a/c 30. Wages & Salaries paid

31.  Travelling expenses

32. current a/c of the partner

33. Loan a/c of a partner

34. Sales return 35. Bank overdraft a/c 36. Loan a/c of the partner

37. O/s salaries a/c 38. Prepaid rent a/c 39. Interest accrued a/c

40. Interest received in advance

Solution:

According to Traditional Approach:

Personal a/c 1, 2, 29, 32, 33, 35, 37, 38, 39, 40

Real a/c 3, 8, 9, 28

Nominal a/c 4, 5, 6, 7, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 30, 31, 34, 36

According to Accounting Equation or Modern Approach:

Asset a/c 3, 8, 9, 28, 29, 38, 39

Page 46: smu account assignment solved

Liabilities a/c 33, 35, 37, 40

Capital a/c 1, 2, 32

Revenue a/c 5, 11, 13, 19, 25, 26, 34

Expenses a/c 4, 6, 7, 10, 12, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 27, 30, 31, 36

Self Assessment Questions:

3. State yes or no

a) State Bank of India is a Nominal Account.

b) Machinery is a Real Account.

c) Life Insurance Corporation is a Personal Account.

d) Proprietor’s Capital Account is a Personal Account.

e) Loan Account is a Real Account.

f) Postage and Telegram Account is a Nominal Account.

g) Interest on investment Account is a Nominal Account.

h) Carriage on Goods Account is a Real Account

i) The giver of a benefit must be debited.

j) Nominal Accounts fall in the category of impersonal accounts.

k) Every debit has an equal and corresponding credit.

l) Loss by fire is a Nominal Account.

m) Outstanding Wages Account is a Nominal Account.

n) Brokerage Account is a Real Account.

o) Investment Account is a Personal Account.

3.6 Accounting Trail

Page 47: smu account assignment solved

Accounting Trial is a sequential order in which the accounting process flows. All transactions are recorded first in a book called journal. The transactions are posted to the respective accounts, maintained in a separate book called ledger. Later, all adjustments such as opening entries, closing entries, adjusting entries are made in a book called journal proper and thereafter, the ledger balances are summarized to form a trial balance. From trial balance, trading account, profit and loss account and balance sheet are prepared.

Accounting trail is the process of:

Self Assessment Questions:

4. Accounting trial is a process starting from identifying the transactions or events to preparation of final statement of accounts. True or False

5. There are three types of accounts namely ____________ and ________________.

6. A trial balance is the summarized form of ledger balances. True or False

3.7 Transactions and Events

A transaction is a business activity involving transfer of money or money’s worth. It may be cash transaction or credit transaction. In cash transaction cash flows immediately where as in credit transaction cash will be paid or received at future date. Assets acquired or sold, liabilities incurred or paid, expenses paid or payable, incomes received or receivable – are all business transactions. But there are events which are neither cash nor credit transactions but it has an impact on the financial position of a business. These events may include provision for bad debts, provision for repairs, depreciation, taxation, transfer of profit towards reserve fund or sinking fund or investment fluctuation fund, etc., Events happen as a result of internal policies or external needs. In accounting, transactions and events have equal relevance and they must be recorded to arrive at the financial results of the business concern.

Self Assessment Questions:

Page 48: smu account assignment solved

7. A transaction is a business activity which involves transfer of money or money’s worth. True or False

8. An event happens as a result of internal policy of an organization. True or False

9. Business transactions and events have equal importance in finding the financial results of the business concern. True or False?

10. Identify the following as transactions or events as the case may be.

i) Depreciation of assets :___________

ii) Tax rates announcement :___________

iii) Acquisition of assets :___________

iv) Selling an asset :____________

v) Transfer of profits to Reserve Fund:______________

3.8 Meaning and rules of debit and credit

Debit and credit are the two words basic for accounting. Debit represents receiving aspect and credit represents giving aspect.

The rules of debit and credit when accounts are classified on traditional approach:

Type of accounts DEBIT CREDIT

Personal account The receiver the giver

Real account What comes in what goes out

Nominal account Expenses & losses Income and gains

The rules of debit and credit when accounts are classified on Accounting Equation Basis:

Types of accounts Rules for Debit Rules for credit

Asset account Debit the increase Credit the decrease

Page 49: smu account assignment solved

Liabilities account Debit the decrease Credit the increase

Capital account Debit the decrease Credit the increase

Revenue account Debit the decrease Credit the increase

Expenses account Debit the increase Credit the decrease

Illustration 3: Analyze the following transactions according to Traditional approach and modern approach:

a. Subramanya started his business with cash

b. Borrowed from Mahesh

c. Purchased furniture

d. Purchased furniture from Mohan on credit

e. Purchased goods for cash

f. Purchased goods from Ram on credit

g. Sold goods for cash

h. Sold goods to Shyam on credit

i. Received cash from Shyam

j. Paid cash to Ram

k. Deposited into bank

l. Withdrew cash for personal use

m. Withdrew from bank for office use

n. Withdrew from bank for personal use

o. Received a cheque from a customer, shyam at 5 pm

p. Deposited Shyam’s cheque next day

q. Bank intimated that shyam’s cheque was dishonored

Page 50: smu account assignment solved

r. Paid Ram by cheque

s. Paid salary

t. Paid rent by cheque

u. Goods withdrawn for personal use

v. Paid an advance to suppliers of goods

w. Received an advance from customers

x. Paid interest on loan

y. Paid installment of loan

z. Interest allowed by bank

Solution:

Analysis of Transaction under Traditional Approach

Sl. no Accounts involved

Nature of account

How affected Debit/ Credit

aCash a/c

Capital a/c

Real

Personal

Cash is coming in

Subramanya is the giver

Debit

Credit

bCash a/c

Loan from Mahesh

Real

Personal

Cash is coming in

Mahesh is the giver

Debit

Credit

cFurniture a/c

Cash a/c

Real

Real

Furniture is coming in

Cash is going out

Debit

Credit

dFurniture a/c

Mohan a/c

Real

Personal

Furniture is coming in

Mohan is the giver

Debit

Credit

ePurchase a/c

Cash a/c

Nominal

Real

Purchase is an expense

Cash is going out

Debit

Credit

fPurchase a/c

Ram’s a/cNominal Personal

Purchase is an expense

Ram is the giver

Debit

Credit

Page 51: smu account assignment solved

gCash a/c

Sales a/c

Real

Nominal

Cash is coming in

Sales is revenue

Debit

Credit

hShyam’s a/c

Sales a/c

Personal

Nominal

Shyam is the receiver

Sales is revenue

Debit

Credit

iCash a/c

Shyam’s a/c

Real

Personal

Cash is coming in

Shyam is the giver

Debit

Credit

jRam’s a/c

Cash a/c

Personal

Real

Ram is the receiver

Cash is going out

Debit

Credit

kBank a/c

Cash a/c

Personal

Real

Bank is the receiver

Cash is going out

Debit

Credit

lDrawing’s a/c

Cash a/c

Personal

Real

Subramanya is the receiver

Cash is going out

Debit

Credit

mCash a/c

Bank a/c

Real

Personal

Cash is coming in

Bank is the giver

Debit

Credit

nDrawing’s a/c

Bank a/c

Personal

Personal

Subramanya is the receiver

Bank is the giver

Debit

Credit

oCash a/c

Shyam a/c

Real

Personal

Cash (cheque) is coming in

Shyam is the giver

Debit

Credit

pBank a/c

Cash a/c

Personal

Real

Bank is the receiver

Cash (cheque) is going out

Debit

Credit

qShyam a/c

Bank a/c

Personal

Personal

Shyam is the receiver

Bank is the giver

Debit

Credit

rRam’s a/c

Bank a/c

Personal

Personal

Ram is the receiver

Bank is the giver

Debit

Credit

sSalary a/c

Cash a/c

Nominal

Real

Salary is an expense

Cash is going out

Debit

Credit

Page 52: smu account assignment solved

tRent a/c

Bank a/c

Nominal

Personal

Rent is an expense

Bank is the giver

Debit

Credit

uDrawings a/c

Purchase a/c

Personal

Nominal

Subramanya is the receiver

Decrease is stock

Debit

Credit

vAdvanced to

Suppliers a/c

Cash a/c

Personal

Real

Suppliers are the receivers

Cash is going out

Debit

Credit

wCash a/c

Advance from customers a/c

Real

Personal

Cash is coming in

Customers are givers

Debit

Credit

xInterest on loans a/c

Cash a/c

Nominal

Real

Interest is expense

Cash is going out

Debit

Credit

yLoan a/c

Cash a/c

Personal

Real

Lender is the receiver

Cash is going out

Debit

Credit

zBank a/c

Bank interest a/c

Personal

Nominal

Bank is the receiver

Bank interest is an income

Debit

Credit

3.9 Accounting equation

The preparation of balance sheet is the final step in accounting process. The accounting equation indicates that the sources of funds should be equal to uses of funds. In other words, proprietor’s equity and liabilities to outsiders should be equal to assets.

Page 53: smu account assignment solved

Where L is liabilities, P is Proprietor’ equity and A is assets.

Steps involved in developing accounting equation:

· Ascertain the variables (Assets, Liabilities or capital) of an equation affected by the transaction.

· Find out the effect (in terms of increase or decrease) of a transaction on the variables of the equation

· Show the effect on the appropriate side of an equation.

Illustration 3:

Transaction 1: Started business with Rs.1, 00,000.

Variables affected Asset and capital

Effect of the transaction Increase in asset and capital

Accounting EquationAsset = Liabilities + Capital

1,00,000 = 0 + 1,00,000

Transaction 2: Purchased Goods for cash Rs.20,000

Variables affected Asset

Effect of the transaction Increase in asset (Stock) and decrease in another asset (cash)

Accounting EquationAsset = Liabilities + Capital

-20,000 +20,000 = 0 + 0

Transaction 3: Sold goods costing Rs.10,000 for cash Rs.12,000.

Page 54: smu account assignment solved

Variables affected Asset and capital

Effect of the transaction Increase in asset (Cash) and decrease in another asset (Stock) and increase in capital

Accounting EquationAsset = Liabilities + Capital

- Stock + Cash

-10,000 +12,000 = 0 + 2,000

Self Assessment Questions:

11. Liabilities plus Equity is equal to ____________________________.

12. Assets minus liabilities to outsiders’ are equal to __________________.

13. If assets are Rs.5 lakhs, liabilities are Rs.3 lakhs, find out the equity.

14. If Owner’s equity is Rs.3 lakhs, Outsider liabilities are Rs.2 lakhs, Owner’s share of profit is Rs.1 lakhs, find out the total value of assets.

15. Every transaction influences balance sheet and it is shown by accounting equation True or False?

Illustration 4: Show what accounts are affected in the following transactions. Also show the accounting equation for the transactions

1. Madan commenced business with cash Rs. 70000

2. Purchased goods on credit 14000

3. Withdrew for private use 3000

4. Goods purchased for cash 12000

5. Paid wages 5000

6. Paid to creditors 10000

7. Sold goods on credit (cost price Rs18000) 22000

8. Sold goods for cash (Cost price Rs.3000) 6000

Page 55: smu account assignment solved

9. Purchased furniture for cash 5000

10. Received from debtors 11000

Solution:

Transaction No

Accounts affected in the books of the business

Account to be debited and account to be credited

01 Capital account and cash account

Cash account being real account is debited and Capital account being personal account is credited

02 Goods account and creditors account

Goods account being real account is debited and creditor’s account being personal account is credited

03 Personal drawings account and cash account

Drawings account being personal account is debited and cash account being real account is credited

04 Goods account and cash account

Goods account being real account is debited and cash account being real account is credited

05 Wages account and cash account

Wages account being nominal account is debited and cash account being real account is credited

06 Cash account and creditors account

Creditor’s account being personal account is debited and cash account being real account is credited

07 Goods account, Debtor’s account and profit account

Debtor’s account being personal account is debited, profit transferred to capital account being personal account is credited and goods account being real account is also credited

09 Furniture account and Cash account

Furniture account being real account is debited and cash account being real account is credited

Page 56: smu account assignment solved

10 Cash account and debtor’s account

Cash account being real account is debited and debtor’s account being personal account is credited.

Accounting equations for the transactions

3.10 Summary

Double entry system has two effects: 1) One account is the receiver of the benefit, 2) Other account is the giver of the benefit. Every transaction has dual effect and recording these two aspects which are known as debit and credit aspects is the fundamental idea behind double entry system of book keeping.

Under traditional approach accounts are classified into personal account, real account and nominal account. Under accounting equation or modern approach, the accounts are classified into asset a/c, liability a/c, capital a/c, revenue a/c and expenses a/c.

A transaction is a business activity involving transfer of money or money’s worth. It may be cash transaction or credit transaction. Events are neither cash nor credit transactions but it has an impact on the financial position of a business. Events happen as a result of internal policies or external needs.

Accounting Trial is a sequential order in which the accounting process flows.

Page 57: smu account assignment solved

The accounting equation indicates that the sources of funds should be equal to uses of funds. In other words, proprietor’s equity and liabilities to outsiders should be equal to assets.

3.11 Terminal Questions

1. The accounting equation is Assets = _______________ + _______________.

2. State the meaning of double entry book keeping.

3. What is accounting trail?

4. Find the value of the following:

a. If the total assets are Rs87000 and the liabilities are Rs47000, find out the amount of capital.

b. If the capital of proprietor is Rs400000 and the total assets are Rs600000, what is the amount of liabilities to outsiders?

c. If creditors are Rs56000, bank overdraft is Rs100000 and outstanding expenses are Rs.8000, what is the total amount of assets?

d. Fixed assets are Rs.70000 and current assets are Rs.100000 and the creditors are Rs.30000. What is capital?

3.12 Answer for Self Assessment Questions

Answers for Terminal Questions:

1. Liabilities + Owner’s capital

2. Every transaction has two aspects, debit and credit and for every debit there is equivalent credit.

3. Refer Unit 3.6

Page 58: smu account assignment solved

4. a) Rs.40000 b) Rs.200000 c) Rs.164000 d) Rs.140000

Answer to Activity 1:

Analysis of the transaction using Modern approach

Accounts involved

Nature of account

How affected Debit/ credit

ACash a/c

Capital a/c

Asset

Capital

Increased

Increased

Debit

Credit

BCash a/c

Loan from Mahesh a/c

Asset

Liability

Increased

Increased

Debit

Credit

CFurniture a/c

Cash a/c

Asset

Asset

Increased

Decreased

Debit

Credit

DFurniture a/c

Mohan a/c

Asset

Liability

Increased

Increased

Debit

Credit

EPurchase a/c

Cash a/c

Expenses

Asset

Increased

Decreased

Debit

Credit

FPurchase a/c

Ram’s a/c

Expenses

Liability

Increased

Increased

Debit

Credit

GCash a/c

Sale a/c

Asset

Revenue

Increased

Increased

Debit

Credit

HShyam’s a/c

Sales a/c

Asset

Revenue

Increased

Increased

Debit

Credit

ICash a/c

Shyam’s a/c

Asset

Asset

Increased

Decreased

Debit

Credit

JRam’s a/c

Cash a/c

Liability

Asset

Decreased

Decreased

Debit

Credit

KBank a/c

Cash a/c

Asset

Asset

Increased

Decreased

Debit

Credit

Page 59: smu account assignment solved

LDrawing’s a/c

Cash a/c

Capital

Asset

Decreased

Decreased

Debit

Credit

MCash a/c

Bank a/c

Asset

Asset

Increased

Decreased

Debit

Credit

NDrawing’s a/c

Bank a/c

Capital

Asset

Increased

Decreased

Debit

Credit

OCash a/c

Shyam a/c

Asset

Asset

Increased

Increased

Debit

Credit

PBank a/c

Cash a/c

Asset

Asset

Increased

Decreased

Debit

Credit

QShyam a/c

Bank a/c

Asset

Asset

Increased

Decreased

Debit

Credit

RRam’s a/c

Bank a/c

Lability

Asset

Decreased

Decreased

Debit

Credit

SSalary a/c

Cash a/c

Expenses

Asset

Increased

Decreased

Debit

Credit

TRent a/c

Bank a/c

Expenses

Asset

Increased

Decreased

Debit

Credit

UDrawings a/c

Purchase a/c

Capital

Expenses

Increased

Decreased

Debit

Credit

VAdvanced a/c

Suppliers a/c

Asset

Asset

Increased

Decreased

Debit

Credit

WCash a/c

Advance from customers a/c

Asset

Liability

Increased

Increased

Debit

Credit

XInterest on loans a/c

Cash a/c

Expenses

Asset

Increased

Decreased

Debit

Credit

YLoan a/c Liability Decreased Debit

Page 60: smu account assignment solved

Cash a/c Asset Decreased Credit

ZBank a/c

Bank interest a/c

Asset

Revenue

Increased

Increased

Debit

Credit

Answer to Activity 2

Copyright © 2009 SMU

Powered by Sikkim Manipal University

.

Page 61: smu account assignment solved

MB0041-Unit-04-Secondary Books

Unit-04-Secondary Books

Structure:

4.1 Introduction

Objectives

4.2 Secondary books

4.3 Purchases Book/Purchases Day book

Cash discount, Trade discount

Difference between cash discount and trade discount

4.4 Sales Book or Sales Day book

Purchase Returns Book

Sales Returns Book

4.5 Bills receivable book

Bills payable book

Cash book

4.6 Posting to Ledger accounts

Posting to Ledger

Summary

4.7 Terminal Questions

4.8 Answers

Page 62: smu account assignment solved

4.1 Introduction

In the previous unit we discussed the meaning of double entry accounting, the various classifications of accounts both under traditional approach and accounting equation approach. Accounting trial is a sequential order in which the accounting process flows.

Journal is a book of original entry. Journal is basically a day book in which transactions are first entered in a systematic manner adopting the principles of debit and credit. Journal is subdivided into several books of original entry, namely purchases, sales, cash, bills receivable, bills payable, returns inwards, returns outwards books. They are also regarded as subsidiary books. When once the transactions are recorded in the journal or other subsidiary books, posting is made to ledger.

In this unit we are discussing the meaning of secondary books, various types of secondary books and posting of entries to ledger accounts.

Objectives:

After going through this unit, you should be able to:

1. List various primary books containing original entries.

2. Explain the meaning of trade and cash discount and the distinction between them.

3. Describe purchase book, purchase return book, sales book, sales return book and the posting of transactions to ledger accounts.

4. Recall the format of Bills receivable and Bills Payable books

5. Know the method of preparing single column, double column and triple column Cash Book.

6. Know the method of preparing Petty Cash Book.

4.2 Secondary Books

Journal is a book of original entry and only one journal is maintained if the business is very small in size and the transactions are limited. However, if the transactions are multifarious, then subsidiary books which are known as books of original entry are prepared. The types of subsidiary books include:

1. Purchases book

2. Sales book

3. Purchase returns book

4. Sales returns book

Page 63: smu account assignment solved

5. Bills receivable book

6. Bills payable book

7. Cash book and

8. Journal Proper.

The entries are made in these books straight without recording in usual journal. From the respective books, posting is made to ledger. In fact, from the entries made in the subsidiary books, journalizing can be done. A detailed note is given in the following paragraphs on each of the subsidiary books.

4.3 Purchases Book

Purchases book is also called purchases journal. Only credit purchases of goods are recorded in this journal. ‘Goods’ mean items or commodities procured for resale. Cash purchases are recorded in cash book and credit purchases are recorded in purchases book. The form of a purchases book is given below.

Trade Discount

It is a reduction granted by a supplier from the list price of goods or services on business consideration (such as quantity bought, trade practices etc). For prompt payment cash discount is allowed.

Example: If 5 gold coins are sold at the list price of Rs.15000 each subject to trade discount of 12%. The trade discount will be calculated as under:

Cash Discount

It is the reduction granted by the supplier from the invoice price in consideration of immediate payment or payment within a stipulated period.

Example: If 5 gold coins are sold at the list price of Rs.15000 each subject to trade discount of 12%. The invoice price after trade discount is Rs.66,000. Cash discount terms are 2%, 30 days. This denotes the buyer will get 2% cash discount if he makes payment within 30 days. The cash discount is calculated as follows:

Page 64: smu account assignment solved

Difference between Trade Discount and Cash Discount:

1. Trade discount is a reduction granted by a supplier from the list price on goods or services on business considerations such as quantity bought, trade practices etc while cash discount is a reduction granted from the invoice price in consideration of immediate payment or payment within a stipulated period.

2. Trade discount is allowed to promote the sales while cash discount is allowed to encourage early or prompt payment

3. Trade discount is shown by the way of deduction in the invoice itself. Hence no further entry is required in the books of accounts. Cash discount is shown as an expense in profit and loss account.

4. Trade discount may vary with the quantity purchased while cash discount varies with the period.

Illustration 1: From the following transactions, prepare the purchase book of Adithya Bros and post the transactions recorded in the Purchase book to the Ledger:

Solution: Purchase Book

Date Purchase Invoice No.

Name of the supplier

L.F. Details Amount

5.3.20X1 442Goyal Bros

Less Trade Discount 10%

5500

550

_____

4950

8.3.20X1 450Adikari Mills

Less: Trade Discount 10%

25000

2500

______

22,500

Page 65: smu account assignment solved

Cash purchases from Greg Mac will be recorded in cash book.

Observe that in every case of credit purchase, the supplier’s account is credited and goods account is debited.

At the end of the day or week or month, the total of purchases is transferred to one ledger account known as Purchases account in the ledger.

Self Assessment Questions:

1. All purchases cash or credit is entered into purchases day book. (State True/False)

2. Purchases of goods and other assets can also be recorded in purchase book. (State True/False)

3. Inwards Invoice is a document to verify the quantity, price and other details of goods purchased. (State True/False)

4. Purchases made from Mr. Ganesh on credit for Rs 6000, entered in the purchases book. What is the journal entry?

4.4 Sales book

Sales book or sales day book contains the details of credit sales of goods made during a particular period. The total of the sales book is transferred to ledger to an account called sales account. The parties to whom credit sales are made are known as trade debtors. All debtors are classified as personal accounts and for each party; ledger account is prepared in the ledger. Sales account shows credit balance and debtor’s account shows debit balance. A pro forma of sales book is as given under.

Illustration 2: From the following transactions, prepare the Sales Book of Adithya Bros and post the transactions recorded in the Sales book to the Ledger:

Page 66: smu account assignment solved

Solution: Sales Book

Date Sales Invoice No.

Name of the supplier L.F. Details Amount

5.3.20X1 442Goyal Bros

Less Trade Disc 10%

5500

550

_____

4950

8.3.20X1 450Adikari Mills

Less: Trade Disc10%

25000

2500

______

22,500

Cash Sales from Greg Mac will be recorded in cash book.

Outward/Sales Invoice number is the number of the invoice issued by the businessman to its customer. Similarly the respective ledger accounts of the customers will be prepared in the ledger.

Self Assessment Questions:

5. Sales day book contains only credit sales of goods made. (State True/False)

6. Sale of any other asset other than goods is also recorded in sales day book. (State True/False)

7. Persons to whom sales are made on credit are called ________.

Page 67: smu account assignment solved

8. Outward invoice is a document issued to customer, when the goods are sold on credit. (State True/False)

4.5 Purchase Returns Book

When the business person purchases the goods and finds they are damaged or not as per the specifications he /she decide to return the goods to the supplier from whom the goods were purchased. All such purchase returns are recorded in a journal called purchase returns book. Normally the supplier’s account is credited when the purchases are made. If the goods are returned, then a debit note will be sent and the number of debit note is recorded in the purchase returns book.

A debit note is a document prepared by the purchaser to inform the supplier that his account has been debited with the amount mentioned and for the reason stated therein.

The total of the items is transferred to ledger to an account called purchase returns account, which shows credit balance. The respective personal accounts of the suppliers/creditors are debited in their respective ledger accounts.

Self Assessment Questions:

9. Purchase returns are also called returns outwards. (State True/False)

10. Purchase returns take place when the goods bought are not as for the specification. (State True/False)

11. When goods bought are returned the suppliers account is _________ and purchase return account is _____________.

12. Debit note is a document to show the supplies account is being debited. (State True/False)

4.6 Sales Returns Book

Sales returns book (also known as Return Inward book) is opened for the purpose of recording the return of goods sold on credit. Then a credit note is prepared to show that the customer’s/debtor’s account is credited to the extent of the value of the goods returned by them to us. Goods are received from the customers and a credit note is sent to them.

A credit note is a document prepared by the seller to inform the buyer that his account has been credited with the amount mentioned for the reasons stated therein. Credit notes are issued to the customers while debit notes are issued by the customers.

Page 68: smu account assignment solved

Format of Sales Returns Books

Date Credit Note No. Name of the Supplier L.F Details Amount

The total of the book is transferred to an account called sales returns account in the ledger and this account shows debit balance. The respective personal accounts of the customers are credited with the value of the goods returned by them.

Self Assessment Questions:

13. Sales return are also called returns inwards. (State True/False)

14. Credit note is a document to indicate that the goods are received as returned by customers. (State True/False)

15. Credit noted is sent by _____________ to __________.

4.7 Bills Receivable Book

When a business person sells goods on credit, the proceeds is received at a later date. Suppose the business person requires cash immediately, he may opt to draw a bill of exchange against the customer. The duly filled bill of exchange is sent to the customer for acceptance. The customer accepts by the way of putting his signature on the bill of exchange and returns it back to the business person. On the receipt of the signed bill, the business person discounts it with his banker for a commission. The business person receives 90 percent of the bill amount on discounting.

Bill of exchange is a document in writing, promising to pay a certain sum of money or money’s worth to the drawer at a certain date for value received. The businessman who draws the bill of exchange is called the ‘drawer’ and the customer on whom it is drawn is called a ‘drawee’ or ‘acceptor’. The businessman maintains a journal/ subsidiary book containing the details of the bills receivable.

Bills Receivable Book of Sham Sundar & Co.,

No. of the bill

Date of Receipt

Date of the

From Whom received

Acceptor Where payable

Term of the bill

Due Date

LF Amount Rs.

Remarks

Page 69: smu account assignment solved

bill

1 04-7-0404-7-04

Mr.X Mr. X Delhi 3 mths7-10-04

7,000

2 1-8-0401-8-04

Mr. Y Mr. Y Noida 4 mths4-12-04

9,000

3 9-9-0409-9-04

Mr. A Mr. A Agra 3 mths12-12-04

12,000

4 10-9-0410-9-04

Mr. B Mr. B Delhi 4 mnth13-1-05

10,000

38,000

For every bill the due date is calculated after adding three days of grace. The total of the bill receivable is transferred to bills receivable account in the ledger. The bills receivable account shows debit balance and the amount receivable against them is an asset.

Self Assessment Questions:

16. A bill is an instrument in writing similar to that of a promissory note. (State true or false)

17. Who is a drawer of a bill of exchange in a business?

18. Who is the acceptor of a bill of exchange in a business?

19. Bills Receivable account shows _____________balance.

20. Can bills receivable be discounted?

4.8 Bills Payable Book

What is bills receivable for a drawer, is bills payable to the drawee. When a business person purchases goods on credit he need not pay for it immediately. Instead he may accept the bills of exchange drawn by the supplier. All such bills accepted by the business person are recorded in a separate book called bills payable book. The sum of the value of bills payable for a period ending will be transferred to the ledger. Usually bills payable account shows credit balance and hence is a liability. The form of bills payable book is given here under.

Page 70: smu account assignment solved

Self Assessment Questions:

21. Bills of exchange drawn by the supplier of goods and accepted by the proprietor of the business are called _________.

22. Every bill has ______days of grace .

23. Bill payable account shows _________ balance.

24. Bill payable represents a ________.

25. When bills payable account is credited ________ account is debited.

4.9 Cash Book

Cash book is an important subsidiary book and a book of original entry. It is a record of cash receipts and cash payments made during a particular period. On the right hand side, receipts are recorded and on the left hand side, payments are recorded. A simple cash book has two sides, receipts side and payment side. The receipts are on debit side and the payments are on credit side. Just as a ledger account, the words ‘To’ and ‘By’ are used. Cash book may also contain cash column and bank column. Cash column represents cash in the business and bank column represents cash kept in the bank. Bank column of cash book is a reflection of bank pass book.

In this connection, it is important to note that in a few transactions, affecting both cash and bank accounts, contra entries are drawn.

Cash book containing cash and bank columns is known as two column cash book. In the case of three column cash book, on the receipt side, cash, bank and discount allowed columns are stated. On the credit side, cash, bank and discount received columns are mentioned.

Page 71: smu account assignment solved

Note the following points from the above illustration:

a) Discount column on the debit side represents discount allowed and on the credit side, it represents discount received. Balancing is not done for these columns for a simple reason to find out separately the discount allowed and received.

b) There are two contra entries each on 15th and 30th. On 15th the transaction is cash withdrawn from bank Rs. 3,000. It is a payment from bank and it is receipt to business cash. Similarly on 30th Cash is deposited to bank Rs.1000. It is a receipt to the bank account and payment from cash account.

c) To indicate contra entry, ‘C’ is mentioned against the entry.

d) Drawings represent the amount withdrawn from bank for business purposes.

e) Dividend from X Co is received by cheque and the company should have remitted the dividend directly to the bank account of the businessman.

f) The balance c/d is the closing balance for the month of January 2002 and this becomes opening balance for February, 2002.

Page 72: smu account assignment solved

Self Assessment Questions:

State True or False

26. Cash book and cash account are one and the same. (State true/false)

27. Trade discounts allowed to customers or received from suppliers are not recorded in cash book.

28. Cash discount allowed to customers appears on the ____ side of cash book. Cash discount received appears on the ____ side of cash book.

29. Discount columns are independently totaled and not balanced. (State true/false)

30. Contra entry is an entry where both cash account and bank account are affected. (T/F)

4.10 Petty Cash Book

In large organizations, petty expenses like stationery, postage, stamps, refreshments, carriage, cartage, daily wages etc are incurred day in and day out. All these expenses are more in number and very insignificant in value. To look after payment of such expenses, a separate petty cashier is appointed who obtains a definite sum of money at the beginning of a month and gives a statement of account at the end of the period to the chief cashier. To record such payments, a separate book, known as petty cash book is maintained.

There is a distinct method, namely Imprest system which is adopted in maintaining such petty cash book. Under this system, at the beginning of a month, a definite sum of money is given by chief cashier to petty cashier for petty expenses. At the commencement of the next period, the petty cashier is reimbursed equal to what he had spent during the earlier period.

Example:

1st Jan 2004: Amount received by the Petty cashier – Rs. 10000

Expenses incurred during the month of Jan 2004 – Rs. 9000

31st Jan 2004: Cash balance – Rs. 1000

Amount reimbursed by the Chief cashier – Rs. 9000

1st Feb 2004: Opening petty cash balance – Rs. 10000

Self Assessment Questions:

31. Petty cash book is maintained in case of petty organization.

Page 73: smu account assignment solved

32. Imprest system of cash book is a system where the expenses incurred are reimbursed.

33. The closing balance in imprest system of petty cash book always remains the same.

34. Imprest system of cash book is also called analytical cash book.

Illustration 3:

Enter the following transactions in an analytical petty cash book. Also open relevant ledger accounts.

2005 Nov 1st. Received a cheque for petty cash Rs.1000

2nd. Paid bus fare to messengers Rs50

4th. Paid auto fare Rs.70

10th. Postal stamps purchased Rs.80

12th. Paid for stationery Rs90

15th. Paid for carriage Rs.60

16th. Purchased envelopes Rs.50

20th. Wages paid Rs 100 .

25th. Tips given to driver Rs.50

30th. Telephone calls paid Rs. 20

Note:

Page 74: smu account assignment solved

1. CBF stands for cash book folio

2. V.No. stands for Voucher No.

3. Tra stands for Travelling expenses

4. Carr indicates Carriage expenses

5. P & S stands for printing and stationery

4.11 Posting to Ledger

The next important stage of accounting is preparation of ledger accounts in a book called ledger. The book contains the summary of transactions concerning to various heads of accounts for a given period. Posting is made to ledger accounts from journal entries and various subsidiary books and at the end of the accounting period, each ledger account is balanced.

Procedure for balancing a Ledger account:

· Total both the debit column and credit column

Page 75: smu account assignment solved

· If the debit total exceeds credit total, put such difference (called debit balance) on the credit side as “By balance c/d”.

· If the credit total exceeds debit total put such difference ( called credit balance) on the debit side as “ To balance c/d”

· Total both the debit side and the credit side of the account

· Enter the date of the next accounting period and bring down the balance of the previous accounting period. If it is debit balance write “To balance b/d “on the debit side of the account and if it is credit balance write “By balance b/d” on the credit side of the account.

Observe the following from the above account:

1. The balance brought down is the closing balance of the last month, December, 2004

2. The amount received from Joseph is Rs.10900 and his account is prepared in the in the page number 35 of the ledger.

3. The credit side contains payment of cash towards salary, furniture, purchase of goods and rent respectively on different dates.

4. The balance carried down is the closing balance on the last day of January, 2005 and it is brought down as opening balance on Feb,1

5. On the debit side, ‘To’ and credit side ‘By’ are the prefix used for every entry as a matter of convention.

There is a standard form of drawing a ledger account. It is similar to that of a pass book issued by a bank. The above illustration is shown in the standard form.

Self Assessment Questions:

Page 76: smu account assignment solved

35. Rules of debit and credit are different for different types of accounts. True or False?

36. The words “To Balance b/d’ or “By Balance b/d” denote an opening entry. State true or false.

37. _________ And __________ are balanced while ______ are closed by transfer to trading and profit and loss account.

38. In the ledger account during the beginning of the accounting period “To Balance b/d” denotes debit balance and “By balance b/d” denotes credit balance. State true or false.

Activity 1

Given in the table are various types of accounts. Mention whether it carries debit or credit balance.

Name of the account Debit / credit balance

Capital

Personal Drawings

Creditors

Bills Payable

Bank overdraft

Loans from others

Outstanding expenses

Pre received incomes

Reserves for future expenses or losses

All items of incomes

Cash in hand or at bank

Assets such as furniture, buildings, plant, machinery, tools, stock of goods, etc

Page 77: smu account assignment solved

Debtors, Bills receivable

Loans given to others

Investments made

All expenses such as wages, carriage, insurance, salaries, printing and stationery, advertising, commission paid, interest paid, etc

Prepaid insurance, rent or any prepaid expenses

Outstanding incomes

Losses like depreciation, loss in the revaluation of assets or sale of assets,

Any other asset

4.12 Summary

Secondary books are also known as books of original entry. They include purchase book, sales book, purchase return book, sales return book, bills receivable book, bills payable book, cash book and journal proper.

Trade discount is a reduction granted by a supplier from the list price of goods or services on business consideration. Cash discount is the reduction granted by the supplier from the invoice price in consideration of immediate payment or payment within a stipulated period.

Bill of exchange is a document in writing promising to pay a certain sum of money or money’s worth to the drawer at a certain date for value received.

Cash book is an important subsidiary book and a book of original entry. It records cash receipts and cash payments made during a particular period.

4.13 Terminal Question

1. Purchases book records___________________ purchases.

2. Cash purchases are recorded on_____________ side of cash book.

3. Credit sales are entered in __________book.

Page 78: smu account assignment solved

4. Record a journal entry for drawings made for personal purposes of the business person.

5. If drawings are made from bank for office purpose, what is the entry?

6. During the year, if the total owner’s equity of Beta Co. increased from Rs. 50,000 to Rs. 60000. This is due to earnings made during the year. Is this statement necessarily true?

7. Enter the following transactions in the single column cash book of Gopichand.

March, 2003

1st .Commenced business with cash 20000

2nd Bought goods for cash 5000

3rd. Sold goods for cash 4000

4th. Goods purchased from Ravi Kumar 10000

10th .Paid to Ravi Kumar 7000

14th. Cash sales 8000

18th. Purchased furniture for office 4000

22nd. Paid wages 500

25th. Paid rent 600

30th. Received Commission 4000

30th. Withdrew for personal purpose 1000

31st. Paid salary 900

8. Record the following transactions in two column cash book (Cash and Bank)in the books of Soft Silk Co., for the month of July, 2004.Find out the closing balances for the month of July 2004.

July, 2004 Rs.

01st. Opening balance b/d(Cash) 14,500

Opening balance b/d (Bank) 7,000

04th. Cash purchases 6,700

Page 79: smu account assignment solved

05th. Rent for June month paid by cheque 2,500

09th. Cash sales 15,200

12th. Dividend paid by cheque 4,350

15th. Cash deposited into bank 5,000

18th. Cash paid to Rahim Bros to settle his account 10,000

20th. Repairs paid 1,000

22nd. Commission paid by cheque 2,000

23rd. Customer, Deepak remitted to our bank account 20,000

25th. Cash withdrawn from bank for office use 5,000

27th. Drawings made from business cash for personal purposes 2,000

28th. Purchased stationery by cash 3,000

30th. Cash withdrawn for personal use from bank 1,400

9. Enter the following transactions in the cash book with discount, cash and bank columns. Prepare three columnar cash book for the month of May.

May 1st Balance of cash in hand Rs. 14000; bank overdraft at bank Rs.5000

4th Invested further capital Rs. 10000 out of which Rs.6000 was deposited in the bank.

6th Sold goods for cash Rs. 30000

6th Collected from debtors of last year Rs. 80000; Discount allowed to them Rs. 2000.

10th Purchased goods for cash Rs. 55,000

11th Paid Ram Vilas, our creditor Rs. 25,000; discount allowed by him Rs.650

Page 80: smu account assignment solved

13th Commission paid to our agent Rs. 5,300

14th Office furniture purchased for cash Rs. 2,000

14th Rent paid Rs. 400; electricity charges paid Rs. 1,000

14th Drew cheque for personal use Rs. 7,000

17th Cash sales Rs. 25,000

18th Collection from Atal Bihari Rs.40,000, deposited in the bank on 19th April

19th Drew from the bank for office use Rs.5,000

22nd Drew cheque for petty expenses Rs.1,500

24th Dividend received by cheque Rs.500, deposited in the bank on the same day

25th Commission received by cheque Rs.2,300, deposited in the bank on 28th April

29th Drew from the bank for salary of the office staff Rs.15,000

30th Deposited cash in the bank Rs.10,000.

10. Prepare petty cash book on imprest system from the following particulars.

i. Jan 1st – Received for petty cash payment Rs. 500/-

ii. Jan 2nd – Paid for postage Rs. 40/-

iii. Jan 5th – Paid for stationery Rs. 25/-

iv. Jan 8th – Paid for advertisement Rs. 150/-

v. Jan 12th – Paid for wages Rs. 50/-

vi. Jan 16th – Paid for carriage Rs. 25/-

vii. Jan 20th – Paid for conveyance Rs. 22/-

Page 81: smu account assignment solved

viii. Jan 25th – Paid for traveling expenses Rs. 80/-

ix. Jan 27th – Paid for postage Rs. 50/-

x. Jan 28th – Paid wages to cleaner Rs. 10/-

xi. Jan 30th – paid for telegram Rs. 20/-

xii. Jan 30th – Sent registered notice Rs. 10/-

4.14 Answer for Self Assessment Questions

Answer for Terminal Questions:

1. Credit

2. Credit

3. Sales Day

4. Drawings A/c Dr.

To Cash a/c

5. Cash account Dr.

To Bank account.

6. The statement is true if additional capital is not brought in during the year. Owner’s equity increases if profits are added or additional capital is brought in.

7. Cash Book of Gopichand

1st March To Capital 20,000 2nd By Goods 5000

Page 82: smu account assignment solved

3rd To Sales 4,000 10th By Ravi Kumar 7000

14th To Sales 8,000 18th By office furniture4000

30th To Commission 4,000 22nd By wages 500

25th By rent 600

30th By drawings 1000

31st By salary 900

31st By bal c/d 17,000

36,000 36,000

Hint: Goods Purchased from Ravi Kumar is a credit purchase.

8. CASH BOOK

July04

Cash Bank July04 Cash Bank

1st To Op bal b/d 14,500 7000 4th By Purchases

6700

9th To Sales 15,200

5th By Rent

2500

15th To Cash (c)

5000 12th By dividend paid

4350

23rd To Deepak

20,000 15th By bank (c) 5000

25th To Bank ( c ) 5000

18th By Rahim & Bros

10,000

20th By repairs 1000

22nd By comm.

paid

2000

Page 83: smu account assignment solved

25th By cash ( c )

5000

27th By drawings 2000

28th By

stationery3000

30th By drawings

1400

30th By balance

c/d7000 16750

34700 32,000 34700 32,000

To Bal b/d 7,000 16,750

9. Cash Book

Disc

RsCash Rs

Bank Rs

Disc Rs

Cash Rs

Bank Rs

To bal b/d

14,000

By balance b/d

5000

To Capital

4000 6000 By purchases

55,000

To Sales

30,000

By Ram vilas 650 25,000

To Debtors 2000 80,000

By commission

5,300

To Sales

25,000

By office furniture

2000

To Atal Bihari

40,000

By rent

400

To Cash (c)

40,000 By electricity

1000

To Bank (c)

5,000

By drawings

7000

To Dividend

500 By banks (c)

40,000

Page 84: smu account assignment solved

To Comm

2300

By cash (c)

5,000

To Cash (c)

2300 By petty expenses

1,500

To Cash (c)

10,000 By bank (c)

2,300

By salary

15,000

By bank ( c)

10,000

By balance c/d

59,300 25,300

Total 2000 2,00,300 58800 Total 650 2,00,300 58,800

10. Petty cash book

Cash recd Rs

Date 1996 Jan

Particulars LFTotal payment

Postage & telegram

Carri-age

Printing & stry

AdvtTravel exp.

Wages Sundry

500 1st To cash

2nd By postage

40 40

5th By

stationery

25

25

8th By advt

150

150

12th By wages

50

50

16th By carriage

25

25

20th By

conveyance

22

22

25th By

travelingCr 80

80

Page 85: smu account assignment solved

27th By postage

50 50

28th By wages

10

10

30th By

telegram

20 20

30th By register

10 10

482 120 25 25 150 102 60

30th By balance

b/d

18

500

500

18 July 1st

To balance b/d

482 July 1st

To cash

Activity 1 Solution

Name of the account Debit / credit balance

Capital Credit

Personal Drawings Debit

Creditors Credit

Bills Payable Credit

Bank overdraft Credit

Loans from others Credit

Outstanding expenses Credit

Page 86: smu account assignment solved

Pre received incomes Credit

Reserves for future expenses or losses Credit

All items of incomes Credit

Cash in hand or at bank Debit

Assets such as furniture, buildings, plant, machinery, tools, stock of goods, etc

Debit

Debtors, Bills receivable Debit

Loans given to others Debit

Investments made Debit

All expenses such as wages, carriage, insurance, salaries, printing and stationery, advertising, commission paid, interest paid, etc

Debit

Prepaid insurance, rent or any prepaid expenses Debit

Outstanding incomes Debit

Losses like depreciation, loss in the revaluation of assets or sale of assets,

Debit

Any other asset Debit

Copyright © 2009 SMU

Powered by Sikkim Manipal University

.

MB0041-Unit-05-Trial Balance

Unit-05-Trial Balance

Structure:

Page 87: smu account assignment solved

5.1 Introduction

Objectives

5.2 Meaning

5.3 Objectives of preparing a trial balance

5.4 Methods of preparing a trial balance

5.5 Preparation of Trial balance

5.6 Adjusting Entries

5.7 Errors and their rectification

5.8 Errors disclosed by Trial Balance

5.9 Errors not disclosed by Trial Balance

5.10 Steps to locate the errors

5.11 Summary

5.12 Terminal Questions

5.13 Answers

5.1 Introduction

In the previous unit we learnt how about various secondary books that include purchase book, sales book, purchase return book, sales return book, bills receivable book, bills payable book, cash book and journal proper. Cash book is an important subsidiary book that records all cash receipts and payments during a particular period. Posting of entries in ledger and the procedure for balancing in ledger account was briefly dealt.

In this unit we have dealt with the meaning, the need of trial balance, and the methods of preparing trial balance. There are different types of errors. Students should be acquainted with types of errors and how they are rectified. There are certain errors that are disclosed in the trial balance while certain errors are not disclosed in the trial balance. Trial Balance is a statement of debit balances and credit balances that are extracted from ledger accounts on a particular date. It stands as a bridge between primary and secondary books on one hand and final statements of accounts on the other hand.

Page 88: smu account assignment solved

Objectives:

After going through this unit, you should be able to:

1. Explain the meaning and recall the format of trial balance.

2. Explain the objectives of preparing a trial balance

3. List the guidelines to prepare a trial balance.

4. Identify and rectify the errors that are disclosed by trial balance

5. Identify and rectify the errors that are not be disclosed by trial balance

6. Know the steps to locate the errors.

7. Prepare trial balance after incorporating adjustments.

5.2 Meaning

Trial Balance is a statement containing the various ledger balances on a particular date. It is prepared to check the arithmetical accuracy of the posting of transactions to the ledger. It is a list of debit and credit totals or a list of debit and credit balances of all the ledger accounts prepared on any particular date to verify whether the entries in books of accounts are authentically correct. As the primary and secondary books are maintained on the double entry concept, the balances in the trial balance must tally.

A trial balance is not a part of books of account. It is drawn as a separate statement, and this becomes the source document for preparing external financial statement such as profit and loss account, cash flow statement and Balance Sheet.

5.3 Objectives of Preparing a Trial Balance:

There are three objectives of preparing a trial balance.

a) To check the arithmetic accuracy of entries made. In double entry, every debit has an equivalent credit. Even in General Journal, we have seen that the total of debits equals the total of credits. Similarly, if the debits and credits tally in a trial balance, it indicates that the books of account are arithmetically accurate.

b) Basis for financial statements. As stated earlier, trial balance is a bridge between ledger and final statements. Trial balance facilitates in the preparation trading account, profit and loss account and balance sheet.

c) It is a summarized ledger. The position of a ledger account is judged simply by looking at the trial balance. It is because, all ledger accounts, after being balanced, are grouped as those

Page 89: smu account assignment solved

showing debit and those showing credit balances. The total of all debit balance is equal to total of all credit balance. If in any case the trial balance does not tally, the difference is temporarily transferred to suspense account till such difference is rectified.

5.4 Methods of preparing a Trial Balance

Totals method and Balance method are the two techniques of preparing trial balance. In the first method, the totals of debits and credits of every account are shown in the trial balance. For instance, a cash account has a debit total of Rs.45000 and credit total of Rs.35000. Creditors has a debit total of Rs.70000 and credit total of Rs.80000. Both these totals are carried to trial balance.

Performa of Trial Balance under Totals Method

The same logic is applied for all other accounts.

Balance Method:

In the Balance method, instead of transferring the totals of both debit and credit, the net balance of every account for example in case of cash account of Rs.10000 (45000 – 35000) is shown on the debit side of trial balance.

If the debit side is greater than the credit side the difference is termed as debit balance. Creditors have Rs.70000 as debit total and Rs.80000 as credit total. The closing balance is shown on the credit side.

If the credit side is greater than the debit side the difference is termed as credit balance.

Page 90: smu account assignment solved

Proforma of Trial Balance under Balance Method

TRIAL BALANCE as on _________

ParticularsDebit balance

Rs.

Credit Balance

Rs.

Cash 10,000

Creditors

10,000

Total 10,000 10,000

In the second method only the difference (debit balance/credit balance) is alone considered. The same principle is adopted for all the other accounts. In the first method, more details are revealed but it is cumbersome. The second method gives the gist of the account and hence the second method is popular.

5.5 Preparation of Trial Balance

The following steps should be followed to prepare a Trial Balance.

a) Prepare the ledger accounts

b) Balance them at the end of accounting period

c) Group all accounts showing debit balance and show them of left hand side of trial balance

d) Group all those accounts showing credit balance and show them on the right hand side of trial balance.

e) Total the debits and credits and they must be equal, what ever be the method of preparing the trial balance.

Illustration 1:

The following are the ledger accounts of Mr. X as on 31st December, 1998.

Prepare a trial balance.

Page 93: smu account assignment solved

Solution

5.6 Adjusting Entries

Financial Accounting uses accrual basis of accounting which is supported by GAAP. Under accrual basis of accounting revenues are recognized when earned without regard to the timings of cash receipts. Expenses are recognized either in the period in which related revenues are recognized or when incurred without regard to the timings of cash disbursement.

Page 94: smu account assignment solved

When such system is used adjusting entries are required to be made at the end of the period to record any previously unrecognized changes in assets, liabilities, revenues or expenses. Adjusting entries are purely internal transactions. There are various types of adjusting entries.

Opening Journal entries:

In the case of running business, all the assets and liabilities of the previous year should be brought down to the current year and therefore an entry is drawn debiting all assets account individually and crediting liabilities account individually and the difference being credited to capital account.

Illustration 2: On 31st Dec, 2004, the following were the assets and liabilities of a firm:

(1) Cash at bank – Rs. 50000;

(2) Furniture – Rs. 48000;

(3) Plant and machinery – Rs.200000;

(4) Debtors – Rs.100000;

(5) Stock in trade – Rs. 20000;

(6) Creditors – Rs. 50000;

(7) Bank loan – Rs. 45000.

On 1st of January, 2005 the assets and liabilities have to be brought in. The following entry is recorded in Journal Proper.

Similarly, a newly set up business may commence its activities with some assets and liabilities. Then the assets are debited and liabilities are credited and the difference is transferred to capital account.

Self Assessment Questions:

1. Opening journal entries are drawn at the commencement of accounting period. (State whether it is True / False).

Page 95: smu account assignment solved

2. When all assets are debited and all liabilities are credited, the difference is transferred to ___________ account.

3. If opening liabilities including capital are more than assets, to what account the difference is transferred?

4. Pass the opening entry in the journal of Bharat as on 1st April 20X1. Cash in hand Rs.1,000; Cash at bank Rs.5,000; Stock Rs.20,000; Land and Building Rs.1,00,000; Plant and Machinery Rs.50,000; Furniture and Fixtures Rs.25,000; Owing from X Ltd Rs.12,500; Prepaid Insurance Rs.500; Interest received in advance Rs.250; Loan from Y Ltd Rs.10,000; Owing to Z Ltd Rs.3,750.

Closing entries

Closing entries are drawn at the end of accounting period and the purpose is to close down several account balances for the current period. The accounts of assets and liabilities will not be closed because they continue to exist further. All expenses and income accounts are closed by transferring them to the respective revenue accounts such as Trading account and Profit and Loss account. Example:

Self Assessment Questions:

5. All revenue accounts are closed at the end accounting period. (State whether it is True / False).

6. All trade expenses are closed by debiting _________account

7. All expenses other than _________ are closed by transferring them to P & L account.

8. Are assets and liabilities accounts closed at the end of the accounting year? (State whether it is Yes / No).

After the closure of accounting year, there might be a few more transactions left over and which are not incorporated into journal or ledger, owing to omission and practical difficulties. Example:

Similarly, with regard to rent paid in advance, expenses outstanding, incomes received in advance etc adjusting entries are made in Journal proper. If they are not considered, the profit or loss reflected by the final accounts will not give the correct picture for the accounting period.

Page 96: smu account assignment solved

Self Assessment Questions:

9. Transaction which are out of trial balance have to be adjusted for proper calculation of profit / loss (state whether it is True / False).

10. What is the adjusting entry in the following cases?

a. Depreciation of Building

b. Closing stock

c. Pre-paid Insurance

d. Outstanding salaries

e. Stock used for personal purposes

Transferring entries

When the balance of one account is transferred to another account, transferring entry is made. For instance, drawings made by proprietor should be reduced from his capital account. To facilitate this, drawings account, which shows debit balance, is credited and capital account is debited (because capital is reduced as a result of drawings). This is a transferring entry and it is recorded in Journal proper.

Compound Entry:

A compound journal entry is passed when more than two accounts are involved in a transaction and the transaction is recorded by means of a single entry instead of passing several journal entries.

Example 1: Paid Rs 980 to Bharat in full settlement of his account of Rs.1000

Journal Entry:

Bharat a/c Dr.1000

To Discount Received a/c 20

To Cash a/c 980

(Being cash paid to Bharat in full settlement of his account)

Example 2: Received Rs.490 from Rajan in full settlement of his account of Rs.500.

Page 97: smu account assignment solved

Journal Entry:

Cash a/c Dr. 490

Discount allowed a/c Dr. 10

To Rajan a/c 500

(Being cash received from Rajan in full settlement of his account)

5.7 Errors and their Rectification

An error is an unintentionally committed mistake. When the Trial Balance does not tally it is a clear indication that there are some errors in the preparation of accounts. The errors may be committed at various stages –

· Journalizing,

· Posting,

· Casting (totaling),

· Balancing,

· Transferring to trial balance and so on.

Mere tallying of the trial balance does not ensure an error free statement. There are certain errors such as errors of omission, error of principle and compensating errors are not disclosed by trial balance while errors of casting, posting to wrong side of an account or posting a wrong amount can be detected by trial balance.

Errors whether disclosed or not disclosed by trial balance, have to be corrected or rectified in order to obtain the correct picture of profit or loss. It should be remembered that errors will have their impact not only on profit but also on the asset and liability position of the business organization.

Self Assessment Questions:

11. Errors can be committed at all stages, beginning from journal entries, posting of entries in ledger accounts, while balancing the closing balances etc. (True / False).

12. Errors of omission, error of principle and compensating errors are not disclosed by trial balance (True / False).

13. Errors of casting, posting to wrong side of an account or posting a wrong amount etc can be detected by trial balance (True / False).

Page 98: smu account assignment solved

5.8 Errors disclosed by Trial Balance

Those errors that can be disclosed by trial balance can easily be located. As soon as the trial balance does not tally, the accountant can proceed to find out the spots where the errors might have been committed. The total amount of difference in the trial balance is temporarily transferred to a ‘Suspense Account’ so that it can be mitigated as and when the errors get rectified. Therefore the suspense account gets debited or credited as the case may be on rectification of these types of errors. The following are the errors which are disclosed by trial balance:

a) Posting a wrong amount: This mistake may occur while posting an entry from subsidiary book to ledger.

b) Posting to the wrong side of an account: This error is committed while posting entries from subsidiary books to ledger.

c) Wrong Totaling: Both under casting and over casting are detected by trial balance. If any account is wrongly totaled, it gets reflected in the trial balance.

Page 99: smu account assignment solved

d) Omitting to post an entry from subsidiary book to ledger: If an entry made in the subsidiary book does not get posted to ledger, the trial balance does not tally.

e) Omission of an account altogether from being shown in trial balance:

f) Posting an amount to a correct account more than once: This result in imbalance in the trial balance.

Page 100: smu account assignment solved

g) Posting an item to the same side of two different ledger accounts: If two accounts are debited /credited for the same transaction, this type of error occurs.

Self Assessment Questions:

14. Suspense account is the difference between debit total and credit total of a trial balance. (True / false).

15. Suspense account is created temporarily and later, it is removed as and when errors are detected and suitable rectified (True / False).

16. If amount paid to Rama Rs 500 is credited to Ramanan accounts, what type of error has occurred and give the rectification entry.

17. Instead of putting Rs. 1500 to debit of wages account, Rs 15000 is recorded. Identify the type of error and tell what impact it has on profit?

18. Refer Q.No.17. How do you rectify the above error?

5.9 Errors not disclosed by Trial Balance

There are four errors regarded as those which do not affect trial balance and it is difficult to locate them. A brief description of the four errors is offered in the following paragraphs:

a) Error of omission: Error of omission occurs when a transaction is completely omitted from the books of accounts.

Page 101: smu account assignment solved

Since both aspects – debit and credit – of the transaction are missing, the trial balance is not affected at all. To rectify such errors, the transaction should be recorded when it is traced.

b) Error of commission: If the error of wrong posting, wrong casting, wrong calculation etc., committed in the books of original entry or ledger, it is said to be error commission.

c) Error of principle: While drawing journal entries, often error of principle is committed and this goes unnoticed because it does not affect the total of trial balance.

Similarly, treating incomes as liabilities, providing insufficient provision for bad and doubtful debts, inadequate depreciation against assets etc., come under errors of principle. They must be rectified by applying the correct principles of accounting.

Page 102: smu account assignment solved

d) Compensating errors: It is also called off-setting error. Compensating error is one which is counter balanced by another error.

Self Assessment Questions:

19. If error of wrong posting, wrong casting, wrong calculation are committed in the books of original entry or secondary books, such errors are called ________.

20. Error of commission affects trial balance (True / False).

21. Furniture purchased for cash Rs 5000/- is not recorded in journal. Mention the type of error?

22. Error of omission can be detected only after a careful review of ledger balances of previous years (True / False).

23. Error of principle affects the value of revenue and capital items (True / False).

24. It is very difficult to find out the compensating errors. (True / False).

5.10 Steps to locate the Errors

The following steps help to locate the errors. In spite of the efforts, if the difference in the trial balance persists, a suspense account may be created and subsequently the suspense account can be eliminated as and when the errors are located and rectification is made.

Page 103: smu account assignment solved

When errors are located, they should be rectified. It is not a good practice nor do we have the legal right to erase the mistakes and re write the correct ones. Rectification entries are recorded in General journal or journal proper.

Self Assessment Questions:

25. Summary of all ledger balances is called _____________________ .

26. Trial balance is necessary to prepare _________________________ .

27. The broad two categories of errors are a) ________________ b) ____________.

28. Is casting error, an error of principle or error of commission?

29. Purchase of machinery is included in the purchases book. What type of error is it?

30. What is error of omission? Illustrate.

31. What are the errors that cannot be disclosed by trial balance?

32. The sum of errors in accounting is transferred temporarily to _________ account.

33. In which journal do you make rectification entries?

34. State any four steps to locate errors.

35. If sales account is under cast by Rs. 45, what is the rectification entry?

36. Returns inwards book is over cast by Rs. 9, write the rectification entry.

37. Salary paid to Gopal is debited to his personal account. What is the rectification entry to correct the error?

38. Discount received Rs. 50 is transferred to the debit side of discount account. Write the rectification entry.

39. An invoice of purchase for Rs. 760 is entered as Rs. 670. What type of error is this? How to rectify this error?

Illustration 1

An accountant finds that the trial balance of his client did not tally and it showed an excess credit of Rs. 69.74. He transferred it to a suspense account and later discovered the following errors.

a) Rs. 44.37 paid to Anand has been credited to his account as Rs. 34.37.

Page 104: smu account assignment solved

b) A purchase of Rs. 145.50 has been posted as Rs. 154.50 to the purchases account

c) An expenditure of Rs. 158 on repairs has been debited to the Buildings account

d) Rs. 80 was allowed by B as discount which has not been entered in the books.

e) A sum of Rs.125.05 realized on the sale of old furniture has been posted to the sales account.

Give journal entries to rectify the errors and show the suspense account as it would appear after adjustments.

Solution

Date Particulars LF Debit (Rs.) Credit (Rs.)

1Anand’s account Dr

To suspense account

(Being wrong amount, wrongly credited to

Anand’s a/c rectified)

78.74 78.74

2

3

4

Suspense account Dr

To Purchases account

(Being over debit of purchase a/c rectified)

Repairs account Dr

To Buildings account

(Being wrong debit given to building account rectified)

B’s account Dr

To Discount received a/c

(Being discount received

9.00

158.00

80.00

9.00

158.00

80.00

Page 105: smu account assignment solved

from B, omitted earlier, brought to account)

5.Sales account Dr

To old furniture account

(Being sale of old furniture wrongly transferred to sales account rectified)

125.05 125.05

Note:

1. The entry should have been:

When amount is paid to Anand, his account should have been debited. On the other hand, his account was credited for a wrong amount of Rs.34.37. Hence there has been excess credit to the extent of Rs.78.74 (44.37 + 34.37). To rectify this double error we need to debit Anand’s account to the extent of Rs.78.74 and credit suspense account.

2. Purchases account was over debited by Rs.9 (Rs.154.50 – Rs.145.50). To rectify this error we need to credit purchase account to the extent of Rs.9 and debit suspense account.

3. Repairs spent on building are, by mistake debited to building account. This is error of principle. Repairs account is debited and buildings account is credited to rectify the error.

4. Discount received from B has not been taken to records. This is an error of omission. Therefore, it is now brought to accounts. This has not affected the trial balance.

5. When old furniture is sold, the furniture account should have been credited. On the other hand, sales account was credited against to the principle of accounting. To rectify the error, sales account is debited and old furniture account is credited.

Page 106: smu account assignment solved

Illustration 2

The trial balance of Evergreen Co Ltd., taken out as on 31st December, 2002 did not tally and the difference was carried to suspense account. The following errors were detected subsequently.

a) Sales book total for November was under cast by Rs1200.

b) Purchase of new equipment costing Rs.9475 has been posted to Purchases A/c.

c) Discount received Rs.1250 and discount allowed Rs.850 in September 2002 have been posted to wrong sides of discount account

d) A cheque received from Mr Longford for Rs.1500 for goods sold to him on credit earlier, though entered correctly in the cash book has been posted in his account as Rs.1050

e) Stocks worth Rs.255 taken for use of Mr Dayananda, the Managing Director, has been entered in sales day book.

f) While carrying forward, the total in Returns Inwards Book has been taken as Rs.674 instead of Rs.647.

g) An amount paid to cashier, Mr. Ramachandra, Rs.775 as salary for November month has been debited to his personal account as Rs757.

h) Pass journal entries and draw up the suspense account.

Solution

Note:

In Q. No.(c): Discount received Rs.1250 is posted on the wrong side of discount account. Discount received (income) should be credited and discount allowed (expenses) should be debited. Instead of crediting the discount received account, it has been wrong debited. To rectify

Page 107: smu account assignment solved

this error, we need to credit discount received account to the extent of Rs.2500 (Rs.1250+ Rs.1250).

In the same context, discount allowed which is an expense should be debited instead, it is credited. To rectify the error, we need to debit discount allowed to the extent of Rs. 1700 (850 +850). The difference between discount received and discount allowed account is transferred to suspense account.

5.11 Summary

Trial Balance is a list of debit and credit totals or a list of debit and credit balances of all the ledger accounts prepared on any particular date to verify whether the entries in books of accounts are authentically correct. As the primary and secondary books are maintained on the double entry concept, the balances in the trial balance must tally.

Totals method and Balance method are the two techniques of preparing trial balance. In the first method, the totals of debits and credits of every account are shown in the trial balance.

Financial Accounting uses accrual basis of accounting which is supported by GAAP. Under accrual basis of accounting revenues are recognized when earned without regard to the timings of cash receipts. Expenses are recognized either in the period in which related revenues are recognized or when incurred without regard to the timings of cash disbursement

5.12 Terminal Questions

1. Prepare a trial balance from the following:

ParticularsAmount Rs.

Particulars Amount Rs.

Drawings 10,000 Interest on investments 200

Stock on 1-1-92 46,000 Sundry Debtors 36000

Page 108: smu account assignment solved

Purchases 1,50,200 Sundry Creditors 29,000

Purchases return 600 Wages 25,000

Cash in hand 3400 Salaries 14,000

Bank Balance 22660 Capital 1,14,000

Freehold expenses 38600 Income tax 1600

Trade expenses 840 Discount allowed 6300

Printing Stationery & advertisement

1640 Discount received 4600

Professional charges 280 Sales 2,08,950

Commission received 3300 Sales return 550

Investments as on 1st

Jan @ 10%4000 Bills receivable 3200

Office furniture 3050 Bills payable 10000

Rent rates and insurance

4000 Provision for bad debts 670

Total 371320 Total 371320

2. The following Trial balance was extracted from the books Chetan, a small businessman. Do you think that it is correct? If not, rewrite it in the correct form.

Debits Rs. Credits Rs.

Stock

Purchases

Returns outwards

8250

12750

700

Capital

Sales

Returns inwards

10000

15900

1590

Page 109: smu account assignment solved

Discount received

Wages and salaries

Rent and rates

Sundry debtors

Bank Overdraft

800

2500

1850

7600

2450

Discount allowed

Scooty

Carriage charges

Sundry Creditors

Bills payable

800

1750

700

7250

690

1. Rectify the following errors:

a. Purchases from Padma Rs.191 posted to her account as Rs.119

b. Purchases from Lata credited to her account as Rs.117

c. Salaries Rs.400 posted to salaries account as Rs.300

d. A cash sales of Rs.430 to Rita posted as Rs.43

5.13 Answers to SAQ’s and TQ’s

SAQ:

1. True

2. Capital

3. Goodwill

4. Opening entry:

5. True

6. Trading

25. Trial balance.

26. final accounts

Page 110: smu account assignment solved

7. Trade expenses

8. No

9. True

10.

a. Depreciation a/c Dr

To Building account

b. Closing stock A/c Dr

To Trading A/c

c. Pre-paid Insurance a/c Dr

To insurance A/c

d. Salaries A/c

To outstanding salaries account.

e. Drawings A/c Dr

To stock account

11. True

12. True

13. True

14. True

15. True

16. It is a wrong posting and hence it is errors of commission

Rama’s a/c Dr 500

Ramanan’s a/c Dr 500

27. Error that are disclosed by trial balance and those which cannot be disclosed by trial balance.

28. Error of commission.

29. Error of principle.

30. Omitting completely a transaction from books of original entry. Sales made to Raghu of Rs 12000 completely ignored.

31. Error of omission, commission, principle, compensating error.

32. Suspense account.

33. Journal proper

34. Four steps to locate the errors

ü Check the total of both sides of trial balance,

ü Total debtors & creditors accounts,

ü Verify whether balancing is done correctly,

ü Check the totals of ledger balances etc.

35.Suspense a/c Dr. 45

To Sales a/c 45

Being sales account which was under cast rectified

36. Suspense a/c Dr.9

To Return Inward a/c 9

Being returned inward book which

Page 111: smu account assignment solved

To Suspense a/c 1000

(Being amount paid to Rama wrongly credited to Ramanan’s account rectified)

17. Posting of wrong amount – Trial balance is affected. Profit (gross) is reduced by Rs 13500.

18. Suspense a/c Dr. 13,500

To Wages a/c 13,500

(Being excess debit to wages account rectified)

19. Error of commission

20. False

21. Error of omission

22. True

23.True

24. True

was over cast rectified.

37. Salary a/c Dr.

To Gopal a/c

Being wrong debit given to Gopal rectified

38. Suspense a/c Dr. Rs.100

To Discount received a/c Rs.100

Being wrong posting in discount received a/c rectified.

39. This is an error of Commission. By checking the original invoice document, it can be rectified.

Purchase a/c Dr Rs.90

To Creditors a/c Rs.90

Being wrong posting in purchase book rectified.

Terminal Question Answers:

1. Trial balance total – 371320

2. Trial balance total – 37790

Activity 1 Solution

Page 112: smu account assignment solved

Copyright © 2009 SMU

Powered by Sikkim Manipal University

.

MB0041-Unit-06- Final Accounts

Unit-06- Final Accounts

Structure:

6.1 Introduction

6.2 Adjustments before preparing final accounts

6.3 Depreciation

6.4 Bad Debts and accounting treatment of bad debts

6.5 Provision for doubtful debts

6.6 Reserves for Discount on Debtors

6.7 Reserve for Discount on Creditors

Page 113: smu account assignment solved

6.8 Closing Stock

6.9 Trading Account

6.10 Profit and Loss Account

6.11 Balance Sheet

6.12 Summary

6.13 Terminal Questions

6.14 Answers

6.1 Introduction

The previous chapter has provided a bird’s eye view of the methods of preparing trial balance, different types of errors and the rectification process. Trial Balance is a statement of debit balances and credit balances that are extracted from ledger accounts. This unit deals with matters relating to adjustments before the preparation of final accounts, depreciation methods, preparation and presentation of Final accounts covering both trading and corporate enterprise.

Financial statement encompasses two vital statements – the position statement reflecting the assets, liabilities and capital of a business entity on a particular date called the Balance Sheet, and the other called the Profit and Loss account showing the results of business operations during the given period. Corporate financial statements should conform to the Companies Act 1956 requirements. The Balance sheet of a company should be presented in accordance with Part 1 of Schedule VI of the Companies Act.

Objectives:

After studying this unit, you should be able to:

1. Incorporate such transactions left out and various adjustments with regard to transactions taking place after the trial balance but relating to the current period.

2. Incorporate adjustments such as Reserve for bad debts, Reserve for discounts on Debtors, Reserve for discount on Creditors, bad debts out side the trial balance.

3. Incorporate adjustments relating to prepaid expenses, outstanding expenses, pre-received incomes, outstanding incomes etc.

5. Prepare Trading, Profit and Loss account and Balance Sheet of both trading companies and corporate entities.

6.2 Adjustments before preparing final accounts

Page 114: smu account assignment solved

The Generally Accepted Accounting Principles (GAAP) supports the accrual basis of accounting according to which revenue is recognized when it is earned and expenses are recognized when they are incurred irrespective of their actual receipt or actual payment. In the accrual basis of accounting adjustment entries are prepared at the end of the period to record any changes in assets, liabilities, revenue incomes and revenue expenses. Adjusting entries are regarded as internal transactions.

A. Outstanding Expenses

Expenses yet to be paid or outstanding expenses for the current period should be charged against the current period’s income. The extent to which the amount belongs to the current year but payable in the next year is called outstanding expenses.

· Salaries outstanding (March 20XX month salary paid in April 20XX)

· Rent outstanding

Prepaid Expenses

Expenses paid in advance or prepaid expenses should be not be charged against the revenues relating to the current period but taken to the coming period. Prepaid expenses form an asset and therefore prepaid expenses account is debited.

· Salaries paid in advance

· Insurance paid in advance

· Rent paid in advance

Example: insurance premium is paid from April, 2004 to March, 2005 and the amount is Rs.3600. The accounting year of the firm ends on 31st December, 2004. Therefore the premium relating to Jan, Feb and Mar of 2005 amounting to Rs.900 is said to have been paid in advance. To record this internal adjustment, the entry is

B. Income received in advance

Income received in advance that does not belong to the current period should not be considered.

Page 115: smu account assignment solved

Rent received in advance

Example: Rent received for one year from 1-4-2005 to 31-3-2006 Rs.48000. Accounts are finalized on 31-12-2005. Therefore rent received for January, February and March of 2006 is said to have been received in advance Rs.12000. The entry is

C. Accrued Income

Accrued income is also called outstanding income. Income yet to be received for the current period should be considered as income for the current period whether actually received in cash or not. Outstanding income account is a personal account and it represents an asset.

Interest accrued but not received

Example: Interest accrued on Fixed Deposit of Rs 200000 at 12% simple interest on 31-12-2006, not yet received. The entry is

Self Assessment Questions:

1. Expenses due but not yet paid are known as ______

2. Prepaid expenses appear on the asset side of balance sheet. (State True / False).

3. Income earned but not received is called ____________.

4. Any income received in advance is a liability (state True / False)

5. Advertisement expenses outstanding for the year ending March 2005 is Rs.5000. Give the journal entry

6.3 Depreciation

Depreciation is reduction in the value of an asset due to constant use of the same, which is called wear and tear. Fixed assets like, buildings, plant, machinery, furniture etc., are subject to depreciation. Whenever, an asset is depreciated, its value goes down and therefore it is a loss to the organization.

Page 116: smu account assignment solved

Depreciation account is debited and the concerned asset account is credited. The item of depreciation may appear in the trial balance, which means that already the concerned asset is reduced by the amount of depreciation. If depreciation is given as an additional adjustment, then the depreciation amount should be charged against profit and loss account on one hand and the concerned asset account is reduced on the other hand in the balance sheet.

There are two popular methods of depreciation:

Fixed installment method (Straight line method) Reducing balance method (Written down value method).

In fixed installment method, depreciation is calculated on cost of the asset. The depreciation charged remains same throughout the life of the asset. In case of reducing balance method (Diminishing balance method), the depreciation is charged on the reducing balance of the book value of the asset. The depreciation amount gets reduced year after year during the life of the asset. Reducing balance method is more popular and well recognized.

Example: The book value of the building is Rs.400000. It is depreciated at 10% on fixed installment method. Show the journal entry and how does it appear in the balance sheet for the first and second year under both the methods.

1. Depreciation charged for the first year under straight line and reducing balance method.

2.

During the first year the depreciation charged is similar under both the methods.

3. Depreciation for the second year under:

Self Assessment Questions:

6. Depreciation is for __________ of an asset.

Page 117: smu account assignment solved

7. What entry is drawn if furniture costing Rs.50000 is depreciated at 5% under straight line method?

8. Calculate the depreciation amount charged for the second year under written down or reducing balance method for Plant and Machinery costing Rs.7,50,000. The depreciation rate is 10%.

6.4 Bad Debts

Bad debts are those debts which are not recovered. Bad debts form loss to the business and reduce the amount of debtors.

Since bad debts are losses, they are debited and the debtor’s account is credited. If bad debts are recovered, cash account is debited and bad debts recovered account is credited.

Accounting treatment of Bad debts:

A. If bad debts are identified and shown in trial balance:

B. If bad debts are shown outside the trial balance:

This denotes bad debts that they were identified after the preparation of Trial Balance. Two adjustments should be incorporated.

Example: The sundry debtors for the year 2005 are Rs.50000. The bad debts amounted to Rs.4000 as on 31-12-2005 already shown in the trail balance. Write off further bad debts Rs.5000. Show how the above internal adjustments appear in the Profit and loss account and Balance Sheet.

Solution

· Bad debts shown in the trial balance is Rs.4000 and not shown in the trial balance is Rs.5000. To incorporate those bad debts not yet shown in the trial balance, the adjusting entry is

Page 118: smu account assignment solved

Self Assessment Questions:

9. Unrecovered debts are called ______.

10. Bad debts are not expenses but they incur loss to the firm. (state True / false)

11. If bad debts are recovered, what entry can be drawn?

6.5 Provision for Doubtful Debts

Debts that cannot be recovered are called bad debts. Debts that are doubtful in recovery are called doubtful debts. From the past experience of the business proprietor, what percentage of good debts may become bad in future can be estimated and in the current year an equal amount of profit is set aside. This provision is also known as Reserve for Bad Debts or Provision for Doubtful Debts or Reserve for Doubtful Debts. Since the provision for bad debts is a charge against current year profit the adjusting entry is

Provision for bad debts is a liability to be incurred in future and so it should appear on the liability side of balance sheet. However, the convention is – RBD (Reserve for Bad and Doubtful Debts) is deducted from the amount of good debtors. The important note here is that RBD is computed as a percentage of good debts, which means total debtors minus bad debts unadjusted.

Provision for bad and doubtful debts is a running account and every year the amount keeps on changing because from the provision made in the current year, bad debts occurring in the following year have to be adjusted and additional amount of provision to be made is calculated.

Illustration 1:

On 1st January 2006, the RBD account stood at Rs.9000 in the books of a merchant. The bad debts written off during the year ended 31st December, 2006 amounted to Rs.4800 and Sundry Debtors stood at Rs.480000. It was desired to maintain the reserve for bad debts at 5% on Debtors. During the year 2007 bad debts written off amounted to Rs.12000 and sundry debtors

Page 119: smu account assignment solved

on 31st December 2007 amounted to Rs.380000. As usual 5% reserve was required. Show the journal entries for recording the above transactions and write up the bad debts reserve account.

Solution

Additional reserve required to be provided in P&L a./c in 2006 is Rs19800

Additional reserve required to be provided in P&L a./c in 2006 is Rs. 7000

Page 120: smu account assignment solved

Self Assessment Questions:

12. What is the difference between Bad debts and doubtful debts?

13. Provision for Doubtful debts is a charge against the profits of the firm (state True / False )

14. Bad debts incurred in the subsequent period are written off against reserve for bad debts (state True / False).

15. Give the journal entry for writing off of bad debts against RBD?

6.6 Reserves for Discount on Debtors

There are two types of discounts allowed to customers in a business. One is trade discount and the other is cash discount. After anticipating the amount of cash discount allowable, a provision is made in the current year itself. In the subsequent years, the actual discount allowed is set off against the provision for discount on debtors. Every year, the amount of provision for discount on debtors is deducted from the profits.

The entry for making the provision is

The following guide lines may be kept in mind while dealing with the reserve for discount on debtors

1. If a reserve for discount on debtors do not exist and cash discount is allowed then transfer the discount to P&L account.

2. Any fresh reserve for discount on debtors is to be made, debit the P&L

Account with the amount of reserve.

3. If provision for discount on debtors exists at the time of providing discount, then write off the discount from the provision already made for the purpose.

4. New provision should then be calculated and only as much as required to bring the existing provision to the new figure should be debited to P&L Account.

5. If the new provision required is lower than the provision already existing (old), then the difference shows profit and transfer the same to P&L Account.

Illustration 2: The following items are found in the trial balance of M/s Sharada Enterprise on 31st December 2000.

Page 121: smu account assignment solved

Sundry Debtors Rs. 160000

Bad Debts written off 9000

Discount allowed to Debtors 1800

Reserve for Bad and doubtful Debts 31-12-1999 16500

Reserve for discount on Debtors 31-12-1999 3200

You are required to provide for the bad and doubtful debts at 5% and for discount on debtors at 2%. Give necessary journal entries and show bad debts account, bad debts reserve account, discount account and provision for discount on debtors account.

Solution

Date Particulars L.F Debit Credit

31.12.2000RBD a/c Dr

To Bad debt a/c

Being bad debts written off against existing reserve

9000 9000

-do-P&L a/c Dr

To RBD a/c

Being addition to RBD to make the new RBD equal to 5% of 160000

500 500

-do-Reserve for discount on debtors a/c Dr

To Discount on Debtors a/c

Being discount on debtors written off against reserve for discount on debtors

1800 1800

-do-P&L a/c Dr

To Reserve for discount on debtors a/c

Being additional reserve made to make the new reserve at 2% on

1640 1640

Page 122: smu account assignment solved

152000

NOTE:

1. The amount debited to P&L Account towards RBD is computed as follows

Old RBD = Rs. 16500

(-) Bad debts = 9000

Balance = 7500

New RBD @5% on160000 = 8000

RBD to be provided = 500 (8000-7500)

2. The amount debited to P&L Account towards Reserve for Discount on Debtors is computed as follows:

Good Debtors = 160000 – 8000 (New RBD)=152000

Old Res for Dis On Drs = Rs. 3200

Less Discount on Drs = 1800

Balance Reserve = 1400

New Res for Disc at 2%

On good drs 152000 = 3040

Res for Discount to be

Provided now = 1640 (3040 -1400)

Page 123: smu account assignment solved

In the balance sheet, the Sundry debtors are reduced by bad debts shown out side the trial balance, the new RBD, discount on debtors shown out side the trial balance and the new Reserve for discount on debtors.

6.7 Reserves for Discount on Creditors

Just as reserve is for discount on debtors is created, reserve for discount on creditors is also created. Businessman expects that he would receive discounts from suppliers (creditors), when the businessman remits cash to them. Anticipating some percentage of creditors being received as discount in the coming year, the business proprietor makes a provision for the expected income in the current year itself. Discount on creditors is an income and therefore reserve for discount on creditors is debited and profit and loss account is credited to show it as anticipated profit. In the subsequent year, when discount on creditors is actually received, it is first set of against provision for discount on creditors and the difference between the new provision for discount on creditors and the balance of old provision left over is carried to P&L Account.

Discount on creditors is income and to that extent the creditors due is reduced. So the journal entry to record them is

If the discount received is adjusted against reserve for discount on creditors, the entry will be

Page 124: smu account assignment solved

When provision for discount on creditors is made in P&L Account, the entry is

The amount of provision for discount on creditors is calculated at a percentage on creditors. In the balance sheet, creditors are shown after deducting reserve for discount on creditors.

6.8 Closing Stock

Stock of goods – raw materials, semi finished goods, finished goods – at the end of the accounting year should be considered for preparing trading account and balance sheet. It is an internal adjustment. Closing stock is normally valued at cost or market price which ever is lower, even though there are several other methods to value stock. Closing stock does not appear in the trial balance because the value of it is ascertained only after the preparation of trial balance. To bring to the records, a journal entry is passed in journal proper by debiting closing stock account and crediting trading account. In the balance sheet, closing stock appears as an asset.

Self Assessment Questions:

16. Provision for Discount on Debtors is a charge against P & L a/c. (State True or False)

17. Provision for discount on debtors appears as a liability in the Balance Sheet (State true/false)

18. Discount on creditors is an item of income (State True / false ).

19. Provision for discount on creditors is shown as an anticipated income (State True/False).

20. What is the entry for adjusting the closing stock?

21. Closing stock always appears as an asset in balance sheet (State true/false)

6.9 Trading Account

Trading account shows gross profit or gross loss arising out of trading activities. Trade means buying and selling. The account mainly focuses on finding the result of goods bought and goods sold. For every expense outstanding and prepaid aspects must be considered. The excess of credit over debit is gross profit and excess of debit over credit is termed as gross loss. The gross profit or gross loss is transferred to Profit and Loss Account. The format of a Trading Account is given below:

To prepare Trading Account, the following steps may be followed:

a) Identify the items of expenses relating to trading and show them on the debit side of Trading Account.

Page 125: smu account assignment solved

b) Effect the adjustments such as outstanding or prepaid to the relevant items of expenses

c) Show the sales less returns and closing stock on the credit side of trading account

d) The difference is gross profit if credit total is more than debit and gross loss if debit total is more than credit.

e) Transfer the gross profit or gross los to Profit and Loss Account as the case may be.

Illustration 3: From the following balances extracted from Trial balance, prepare Trading Account. The closing stock at the end of the period is Rs. 56000

Particulars Amount in Rs.

Stock on 1-1-2004 70700

Returns inwards 3000

Returns outwards 3000

Purchases 102000

Debtors 56000

Creditors 45000

Carriage inwards 5000

Carriage outwards 4000

Page 126: smu account assignment solved

Import duty on materials received from abroad 6000

Clearing charges 7000

Rent of business shop 12000

Royalty paid to extract materials 10000

Fire insurance on stock 2000

Wages paid to workers 8000

Office salaries 10000

Cash discount 1000

Gas, electricity and water 4000

Sales 250000

6.10 Profit and Loss Account

Profit and loss account is an important final account that reveals the net result of the business in the form of net profit or net loss. All revenue receipts are those which are received regularly arising out of day to day activities of the business and all revenue payments, which are known as expenses are incurred regularly are recorded in profit and loss account. Any capital receipts or capital payments are not considered while preparing profit and loss account.

The following steps may help to prepare Profit and Loss Account

1. Identify the expenses and bring them to debit side of P&L Account

2. Identify the revenue incomes and put them on the credit side of P&L Account

Page 127: smu account assignment solved

3. Check whether all adjustments like outstanding, prepaid, pre received expenses and incomes as the case may be are brought to the account

4. Check the transfer of reserves to the relevant sides of the account

5. Transfer the net profit / net loss to the capital account

Illustration 4: The following Trial Balance is extracted from the books of a merchant on 31-12-2004.

Furniture and fittings 640 Bank Over Draft 2850

Motor Vehicles 6250 Sales Returns 200

Buildings 7500 Purchase Returns 125

Capital Account 12500 Advertising 450

Bad Debts 125 Interest on Bank Over Draft118

Provision for Bad debts 200 Commission 375

Sundry Debtors 3800 Cash 650

Sundry Creditors 2500 Taxes and Insurance 1250

Stock on 1-1-2004 3460 General Expenses 782

Page 128: smu account assignment solved

Purchases 5475 Salaries 3300

Sales 15450

The following adjustments are to be made:

1. Stock in hand on 31-12-2004 was Rs.3250

2. Depreciate Buildings at the rate of 5%, Furniture and fittings @ 10% and Motor Vehicles @ 20%.

3. Rs.85 is due for interest on bank overdraft.

4. Salaries of Rs300 and taxes Rs.120 are outstanding.

5. Insurance amounting to Rs.100 is prepaid

6. One-third of the commission received is in respect of work to be done next year

7. Write off a further sum of Rs.100 as bad debts and provision for bad and doubtful debts to be made equal to 10% on sundry debtors.

8. Prepare Trading Account and Profit and Loss Account.

6.11 Balance Sheet

Corporate financial statement is financial statements / annual accounts of corporate enterprises that are prepared in conformity with the Companies Act 1956. Section 209 of the companies Act requires that every company should keep at its registered office proper books of accounts.

Page 129: smu account assignment solved

Section 210 of the Companies Act stipulates that at every annual general meeting of a company, the Board of Directors should lay (a) a balance sheet as at the end of the period and (b) a profit and loss account for the period (financial year).

Section 211 requires that every balance sheet of a company should provide a true and fair view of the state of affairs of a company as at the end of the financial year and it should be set out in the form prescribed in Part 1 of Schedule VI of the Companies Act 1956.

Section 215 of the Act requires that every balance sheet and P&L account duly approved by the Board of Directors should be signed on behalf of the Board of Directors of a company by its managers or secretary, if any, and at least two directors one of whom should be a managing director, if any.

Section 216 of the Act requires that the profit and loss account of a company is annexed to the balance sheet and the auditor’s report including separate, special or supplementary report if any.

Share Capital

Share capital refers to the capital raised by a company by the issue of share in a company is one of the units into which the total capital of the company is divided.

Preference Share Capital

Preference share capital is that part of share capital of a company which carries preferential right in respect of both dividend payment and repayment of capital.

Equity Share Capital

All share capitals which are not preference share capital are equity share capital. In other words, holders of equity share capital can get dividend only after it is paid to preference shareholders.

Authorized Share Capital

Page 130: smu account assignment solved

It is the maximum amount of the equity share capital and preference share capital the company can rise in its life time.

Issued Capital

It is that part of the equity and preference share capital which has been actually issued by the company for cash and for considerations other than cash

Subscribed Capital

It refers to that part of the equity and preference share capital which has been actually allotted by the company.

Called-up Capital

It refers to that part of the allotted capital which has been called-up by the company and the part which has not been called-up is the uncalled capital.

Paid – up Capital

It refers to the amount released on the called-up capital and it is equal to the called-up capital minus unpaid calls.

Illustration 5: From the following trial balance of Anjana Machineries Limited and additional information, prepare final accounts of the company as per schedule VI of the Companies Act.

Additional information:

1. Stock as at March 31,2008

Page 131: smu account assignment solved

Raw materials and stores Rs. 1,45,000; Work-in-process, Rs. 22,000; Finished goods, Rs. 1,98,000.

2. Provide depreciation on written down value basis on plant and machinery @ 20 per cent per annum and on furniture @ 15 per cent annum and on freehold premises @ 5 per cent per annum

3. In the middle of the year machine costing Rs. 3,00,000 was purchased and duly recorded

4. Sundry debtors include Rs. 18,000 due for more than six months. Provide for bad and doubtful debts @ 5 per cent on debtors.

5. Market value of investments is Rs. 3,19,000

6. Make a provision for income-tax @ 35 per cent

7. Corporate dividend tax is 14.025 per cent including surcharge of 10 per cent and education cess of 2 per cent.

8. The Board of Directors has recommended a final dividend @ 15 per cent on equity shares.

9. Transfer Rs. 1,00,000 to debenture redemption reserve.

10. Transfer minimum amount to statutory reserve as required by company law.

11. Provision for depreciation on freehold premises as in 31/03/2007 was Rs. 12,70,000.

12. Write of 1/5th of preliminary expenses

13. Interest on debentures becomes due on October 31 and March 31.

Solution

Page 132: smu account assignment solved

6.12 Summary

The Generally Accepted Accounting Principles (GAAP) supports the accrual basis of accounting according to which revenue is recognized when it is earned and expenses are recognized when they are incurred irrespective of their actual receipt or actual payment. Outstanding expenses yet

Page 133: smu account assignment solved

to be paid or outstanding expenses for the current period should be charged against the current period’s income.

Prepaid expenses paid in advance or prepaid expenses should be not be charged against the revenues relating to the current period but taken to the coming period. Depreciation is reduction in the value of an asset due to constant use of the same, which is called wear and tear. Fixed assets like, buildings, plant, machinery, furniture etc., are subject to depreciation. Whenever, an asset is depreciated, its value goes down and therefore it is a loss to the organization.

Corporate financial statement is financial statements / annual accounts of corporate enterprises that are prepared in conformity with the Companies Act 1956. Section 209 of the companies Act requires that every company should keep at its registered office proper books of accounts.

6.13 Terminal Questions

1. Explain the meaning of Depreciation. Mention the different types of depreciation.

2. What is Bad debts? Mention the accounting treatment of bad debts

3. What is Provision for Doubtful Debts?

4. What are the guidelines that deal with reserve for discount on debtors?

5. Explain reserve for discount on creditors with suitable examples.

6.14 Answer to SAQ’s and TQ’s

1. Outstanding expenses

2. True

3. Accrued or Outstanding income

4. True

5. Advertisement expenses a/c Dr To Outstanding Advertisement expenses a/c

6. Wear and Tear

7. Depreciation a/c Dr.2500

To Furniture a/c 2500

Being furniture depreciated

12. Bad debts are totally not recoverable, doubtful debts may be recovered.

13. True

14. True

15. Reserve for Bad debts a/c Dr

To Bad debts a/c

16. True

17. True

18. True

Page 134: smu account assignment solved

8. (7,50,000-75,000) = 6,75,000 x 10% = 67,500

9. Bad debts

10. True

11. Cash a/c

To Bad debts recovered a/c

19. True

20. Closing stock a/c Dr

To Trading a/c

21. True

Answer for Terminal Question:

1. Refer Unit 6.3

2. Refer Unit 6.4

3. Refer Unit 6.5

4. Refer Unit 6.6

5. Refer Unit 6.7

Copyright © 2009 SMU

Powered by Sikkim Manipal University

MB0041-Unit-07-Introduction to Management Accounting

Unit-07-Introduction to Management Accounting

Structure:

7.1 Introduction

7.2 Meaning of Management accounting

7.3 The Role of Management Accounting

7.4 Management Accounting Framework

7.5 Functions of Management Accounting

7.6 Tools of Management Accounting

Page 135: smu account assignment solved

7.7 The Balanced Scorecard

7.8 Cost Management System

7.9 Value Added Concept

7.10 Merits of Management Accounting

7.11 Demerits of Management Accounting

7.12 Distinction between Management Accounting and Financial Accounting

7.13 Summary

7.14 Terminal Questions

7.15 Answers to SAQ’s and TQ’s

7.1 Introduction

The origins of modern management accounting can be traced to 19th century enterprises like textile mills, family owned business etc. These enterprises were formed as a single large organization wherein different processes were performed taking advantage of the economies of scale. Slowly a need was felt to measure the efficiency of the internal production processes. Typically for textile mill, the internal measure could be cost per yard, and for a fertilizer unit it may be cost per tonne of fertilizer

Management accounting system plays a vital note in helping the managers to plan & control their operation. A good management accounting system may not guarantee competitive success if the firm does not have good products, efficient operating process, effective marketing & sales activities.

Objectives:

After studying this unit, you should be able to:

1. Explain the meaning of Management Accounting

2. Explain the strategic role of management accounting in the present day setup.

3. Describe the functions of management accounting

4. State the tools of management accounting

Page 136: smu account assignment solved

5. Know the balance score card, Cost management system and value added concept

6. Identify the differences between management accounting and financial accounting.

7.2 Meaning

Managerial accounting is the process of identifying, measuring, analyzing, interpreting and communicating information in pursuit of an organization’s goal. Managerial accounting is an integral part of the management process. Management accountants have taken leadership roles; act as trusted advisor and transformed into strategic business partner for the valuable contribution they provide.

The American Accounting association has defined Management Accounting as ‘the application of appropriate techniques and concepts in processing historical and projected economic data of an entity to assist management in establishing plans for reasonable economic objectives in the making of rational decisions with a view towards achieving these objectives.

Management Accounting is the presentation of accounting information in such a way as to assist management in the creation of policy and in the day-to-day operations of an undertaking.

7.3 The Role of Management Accounting

Management accounting information serves several major roles. One of the most important types of management accounting information is cost information. Firms use cost information to make important product features and product mix decision. Also organizations use appropriate cost information to improve efforts on activities that are major contributors to cost.

The accounting people are expected to do things that are much more strategic and forward looking. Nowadays managerial accountants serve as internal business consultants involving in all areas of business. They take on leadership roles on their teams and are sought out for the valuable information they provide. The role of the accountants in leading edge companies has been transformed from number cruncher and financial historian to being business partner and trusted advisor. Another important transformation is the role it plays in strategic management highlighted in Balanced Score Card and Value Chain.

Management accountants add value to an organization by pursuing five major objectives:

1. Providing information for decision making and planning and proactively participating as part of the management team in decision making and planning processes. This includes budget preparation on projected revenues and costs.

2. Assisting managers in directing and controlling operational activities. Managerial accounting information often assists management through its attention-directing function. However managerial accounting information often directs managers’ attention to an issue that requires their skills.

Page 137: smu account assignment solved

3. Motivating managers and other employees towards the organization’s goals. Organizations have goals and organization comprise people who have goals of their own. The goals of individuals are diverse and they do not always match those of the organization. The main purpose of managerial accounting is to motivate managers and other employees to direct their efforts with the help of budgeting.

4. Measuring the performance of activities, subunits, managers and other employees within the organization. Such measurements can be used as the basis for rewarding performance through positive feedback, promotions and pay raises.

5. Assessing the organization’s competitive position due to ever changing business environment. These changes are reflected in global competition, fast changing technology, improved communication system etc.

Organization’s competitive position is determined by how well it is doing from customer’s perspective. Secondly how the organization is performing its internal operations and business processes. Thirdly how well is it in research and development? Does it provide a platform for learning, continuous improvements and adaptation to new technology. Finally it assesses the financial health in terms of liquidity, ability to raise finance, viability and future growth.

Self Assessment Questions:

1. Management accountants have transformed from mere cost information providers to _______________________

2. Management accountants facilitate in budget preparation on projected ______

3. Management accountants assess organization’s _______________that arise due to changing business environment.

4. Competitive position of a firm is determined by how well it provides a platform for __________, ___________________ and adaptation to new technology.

7.4 Management Accounting Framework

For offering accounting and financial advice as well as for capitalizing the available opportunities for future development, it is necessary that an effective frame must be designed. The management accountant must organize the whole accounting division in such a way that there is prompt and immediate recording of the entire information flow into the department from functional and service department. The frame must concentrate on.

· Getting rid of routine work

· Reporting actual and planned performance

· Fixing organizational responsibilities

Page 138: smu account assignment solved

· Application of new modern and modified practices of analyzing and interpreting results.

· Designing of sound and efficient organization taking into account the native and size of the business unit.

7.5 Functions of Management Accounting

Management accounting functions may be said to include collecting, processing, interpreting and presenting information to management. Management Accounting serves as a vital source of data for management planning. The data thus collected are properly complied and classified. The accounting data is then analyzed meaningfully for effective planning and decision making through comparative statements. It provides a means for communicating management plans upward, downward and at lateral levels. It helps in translating given objectives and strategies into specified goals for attainment by a specified time and secures effective accomplishment of these goals in an effective manner. More specifically, it provides invaluable service to the management at every stage of functioning. Major functions are:

Forecasting and Planning: Short and long term forecasts are very essential. Planning the future operations of a business is crucial. This includes profit planning, programmes of capital investment and financing, sales forecast, expense budget and cost standards.

Controlling Performance: The management accounting is very helpful in controlling the financial performance of the organization through comparing actual performance with operating plans and standards and to report and interpret the results of operations to all levels of management.

Coordinating: Management accountant consults various departments and is responsible for policy decisions. Coordination increases the efficiency of an organization.

Other functions: Management accounting serves in a number of other ways. It supplies useful information to different functional authorities. It provides accounting information and advice for price determination and pricing decisions. It also helps in making certain strategic decisions, decisions regarding seasonal or temporary suspension of production, make or buy decisions, replacement decisions etc.

Self Assessment Questions:

5. Management Accounting serves as a vital source of data for management _________.

6. It provides a means for communicating management plans ______, __________and at _________levels.

7. The management accounting is very helpful in controlling the financial performance of the organization through comparing actual performance with __________________.

Page 139: smu account assignment solved

7.6 Tools of Management Accounting

Management Accounting uses the following tools or techniques to fulfill its responsibilities and duties towards management.

· Financial Statement Analysis

· Funds Flow Analysis

· Cash Flow Analysis

· Costing Techniques that includes marginal costing, differential costing, standard costing, and responsibility costing

· Budgetary control

· Management Reporting.

Financial Statements are indicators of two significant factors that include profitability and financial soundness. Analysis and interpretation of financial statements enables full diagnosis of the profitability and financial soundness of the firm. Analysis means methodical classification of the data given in the financial statements. Methodical classification enables comparison of the various inter-connected figures with each other. Interpretation explains the meaning and significance of the data.

Funds Flow Analysis is an important tool for management accountant. It reveals the changes in working capital position, the sources from which the working capital was obtained and the purpose for which it was used. It also reveals the changes that have taken place behind the Balance Sheet.

Cash Flow Statement identifies the sources and application of cash. It is prepared on the basis of actual or estimated data. It depicts the changes in the cash position from one period to another. A projected cash flow or a cash budget will help the management in ascertaining how much cash will be available to meet obligations to trade creditors, to pay bank loans and to pay dividends to the shareholders.

Standard Costing is the preparation and use of standard costs, their comparison with actual costs and the analysis of variance. It discloses the cost of deviations from standards. It aims at assessing the cost of a product, process or operation under standard operating conditions.

Budgetary Control has become an essential tool of management for controlling costs and to maximize profit. It helps to compare the current performance with pre-planned performance thereby correcting the deviations if any.

Page 140: smu account assignment solved

Management Reporting System is an organized method of providing each manager with all the data and only those data which he needs for his decisions, when he needs them and in a form which aids his understanding and stimulates his action.

Self Assessment Questions:

8. ______________ is the preparation and use of standard costs, their comparison with actual costs and the analysis of variance.

9. ___________ will help the management in ascertaining how much cash will be available to meet obligations to trade creditors, to pay bank loans and to pay dividends to the shareholders.

10. ______________________reveals the changes in working capital position, the sources from which the working capital was obtained and the purpose for which it was used.

11. ____________ means methodical classification of the data given in the financial statements.

12. __________________helps to compare the current performance with pre-planned performance thereby correcting the deviations if any

7.7 The Balanced scorecard

The Balanced Score Card is a framework for integrating measures derived from strategy. While retaining financial measures of past performance, the Balanced Score Card introduces the drivers of future financial performance. (Figure 1) The drivers (customer, internal business process, learning & growth perspectives) are derived from the organization’s strategy translated into objectives and measures.

The Balanced Score Card is more than a measurement system it can be used as an organizing framework for their management processes. The real power of the Balanced Score Card is when it is transformed from a measurement system to a management system. It fills the void that exists in most management systems – the lack of a systematic process to implement and obtain feedback about strategy

Page 141: smu account assignment solved

In India few noted organizations have adopted Balanced Score Card successfully. The commercial vehicles business unit (CVBU) of Tata Motors was among the first Asian organizations to be inducted into the prestigious Balanced Scorecard Hall of Fame, in recognition of its exemplary success with the model. The company is one of the world’s top 10 truck manufacturers and the CVBU began deployment of Balanced Scorecard in 2000, in an attempt to remedy years of poor financial performance. The focus was on achieving a turnaround, and then progressing to sustainable growth. Within 2 years of implementation, the company began to show tangible improvement in performance including a 40% growth in revenue.

The implementation of the Balanced Scorecard has enabled them to focus on different elements of operational performance. Defining, cascading and communicating strategies across the organization have brought about transparency and alignment. The scorecard incorporates SQDCM (Safety, Quality, Delivery, Cost and Morale) and VMCDR (Volume, Market Share, Customer Satisfaction, Dealer Satisfaction and Receivables).

7.8 Cost Management System

The explosion in technology we are experiencing, coupled with increasing worldwide competition is forcing managers to produce high quality goods and services, provide outstanding customer service and do so at the lowest possible cost. Many companies have moved away from a historical cost accounting perspective and toward a proactive cost management perspective. A cost management system is a management planning and control system with the following objectives.

1. To measure the cost of the resources consumed in performing the organization’s significant activities

2. To identify and eliminate non-value added costs. These are the costs of activities that can be eliminated with no deterioration of product quality, performance or perceived value.

3. To determine the efficiency and effectiveness of all major activities performed in the enterprises.

4. To identify and evaluate new activities that can improve the future performance of the organization.

7.9 Value Added Concept

Value added concept is a performance measure and it reports the wealth generated by a business undertaking over a period of time. According to ICAI, the term value added refers to ‘the increase in value of a product or service resulting from an alteration in the form, location or availability excluding the cost of bought out materials and services’ It is calculated by deducting the value of goods and services purchased from sales revenue. It is a versatile measure for evaluating the performance and efficiency of a firm because value added measure caters all concerned parties viz., owners, workers, government, lenders etc.

Page 142: smu account assignment solved

Value added Statement is based on ‘enterprise theory’ rather than ‘entity theory’. Enterprise theory encompasses everyone unlike entity theory which focuses on owners or shareholders of the firm.

Self Assessment Questions:

13. _____________is a performance measure and it reports the wealth generated by a business undertaking over a period of time

14. ____________________identify and eliminate non-value added costs

15. The drivers of Balanced Score Card are ___________, _________________,___________________ and _____________________

7.10 Merits of Management Accounting

Merits

1. Efficient planning and organization which are the end product of the system of management accounting bring systematic regularity in the business activities.

2. Maximum return on capital employed is ensured by the use of management accounting because it helps in the functions of planning, coordination and control

3. Better and improved services by management to customers are assured by this system.

4. Management accounting removes unacceptable standards or sub-standards.

5. Industrial relations may be improved by adoption of management accounting principles.

6. Eliminations of various types of wastages, production defectives and other related work deficiencies are removed with the help of management accounting.

7. Economic uplift of community and development of nation’s economy can be achieved by the use of management accounting.

7.11 Demerits of Management Accounting

1. Most of the information used in Management accounting is derived from financial accounting records or cost accounting records other records. As such fairness and accuracy of decisions deduced depends to a greater extent upon fairness and accuracy of these original records.

2. Decisions or conclusions derived are insignificant unless properly executed at all levels of business operations.

Page 143: smu account assignment solved

3. Management accounting is a mere tool for management. It cannot substitute for financial accounting.

4. The evolution has been on account of inter-alia development of new theories in other sciences. Hence there is a need to have a comprehensive knowledge and understanding of all these related disciplines to derive the full advantage.

5. Management accounting is still in its evolutionary stage. Hence, there is an uncertainty in its use.

6. The installation of management accounting is a costly affair and as such it has very limited scope for its use.

7.12 Distinction between Management Accounting and Financial Accounting

Financial accounting is the preparation and communication of financial information to outsiders such as creditors, bankers, government, customers and so on. Another objective of financial accounting is to give complete picture of the enterprise to shareholders. Management accounting on the other hand aims at preparing and reporting the financial data to the management on regular basis. Management is entrusted with the responsibility of taking appropriate decisions, planning, performance evaluation, control, management of costs, cost determination etc., For both financial accounting and management accounting the financial data is the same and the reports prepared in financial accounting are also used in management accounting But the following are major differences between Financial accounting and Management accounting.

Financial accounting Management accounting

· The primary users of financial accounting information are shareholders, creditors, government authorities, employees etc.,

· Top, middle and lower level managers use the information for planning and decision making

· Accounting information is always expressed in terms of money

· Management accounting may adopt any measurement unit like labour hours, machine hours or product units for the purpose of analysis

· Financial data is presented for a definite period, say one year or a quarter

· Reports are prepared on continuous basis, monthly or weekly or even daily

· Financial accounting focuses on historical data

· Management accounting is oriented towards future

Page 144: smu account assignment solved

· Financial accounting is a discipline by itself and has its own principles, policies and conventions

· Management accounting makes use of other disciplines like economics, management, information system, operation research etc.,

Self Assessment Questions:

16. Management accounting aims at preparing and reporting financial data to _____________.

17. Management accounting is oriented towards ______

18. In ____________financial data is presented for a definite period, say one year or a quarter

19. __________accounting may adopt any measurement unit like labour hours, machine hours or product units for the purpose of analysis

7.13 Summary

Management Accounting is the presentation of accounting information in such a way as to assist management in the creation of policy and in the day-to-day operations of an undertaking.

The accounting people are expected to do things that are much more strategic and forward looking. Nowadays managerial accountants serve as internal business consultants involving in all areas of business. They take on leadership roles on their teams and are sought out for the valuable information they provide. The role of the accountants in leading edge companies has been transformed from number cruncher and financial historian to being business partner and trusted advisor.

The tools of Management Accounting are financial statement analysis, funds flow analysis, cash flow analysis, budgetary control, Management Reporting system.

The Balanced Score Card is a framework for integrating measures derived from strategy.

A cost management system is a management planning and control system

Value added concept is a performance measure and it reports the wealth generated by a business undertaking over a period of time.

7.14 Terminal Questions

1. Briefly explain the role of Management Accounting.

2. Describe the functions of Management Accounting.

3. Explain the tools of Management Accounting.

Page 145: smu account assignment solved

4. What is Balanced Score Card?

5. What is Cash Management System?

6. Distinguish between Management Accounting and Financial Accounting

7. What is Valued added concept?

7.15 Answer for SAQ’s and TQ’s

SAQ 1:

1. Strategic Business Partner

2. Revenues and Costs

3. Competitive Position

4. Learning, continuous improvement

5. Planning

6. Upward, downward, lateral

7. Operating plans & standards

8. Standard costing

9. Cash budget

10. Funds Flow statement

11. Analysis

12. Budgetary Control

13. Value added concept

14. Cost Management System

15. Customer, internal business process, learning, growth perspective

16. Management

17. Future

18. Financial Accounting

19. Management

Answer for Terminal Questions:

1. Refer to unit 7.3

2. Refer to unit 7.5

3. Refer to unit 7.6

Page 146: smu account assignment solved

4. Refer to unit 7.7

5. Refer to unit 7.8

6. Refer to unit 7.12

7. Refer to unit 7.9.

Copyright © 2009 SMU

Powered by Sikkim Manipal University

.

MB0041-Unit-08-Financial Statement Analysis

Unit-08-Financial Statement Analysis

Structure:

8.1 Introduction

Objectives

8.2 Meaning of Ratio

8.3 Steps in Ratio Analysis

8.4 Classification of Ratios

Page 147: smu account assignment solved

8.5 Du Pont Chart

8.6 Solved Problems

8.7 Advantages of Ratio Analysis

8.8 Limitation of Ratio analysis

8.9 Summary

8.10 Terminal Question

8.11 Answers to SAQs and TQs

8.1 Introduction

“Every fact that is learned becomes a key to other facts” – E.Y. Youmans. Based on this, this unit deals with analysis of financial statements, the functions of which is to identify and highlight the firm’s strengths and weaknesses. The objective of ratio analysis is to provide with the financial information necessary to make financial decisions.

Objectives:

After completing this unit, you should be able to:

1. Explain the meaning, various forms of ratio analysis and its role in comparative analysis

2. Describe the steps involved in ratio analysis

3. Explain the classification of ratios

4. Calculate various ratios from Balance Sheet and Income Statement

5. Derive balance sheet items using various ratios

8.2 Meaning of Ratio

Absolute numbers tell very little. Assume that two companies A and B, operating within the same industry submit the information:

Company A Company B

NET PROFIT 10000 100000

Page 148: smu account assignment solved

One can easily say that Company B makes the most profit. But which company is most profitable? The answer for this will naturally call for further additional information relating to profit such as size of the company, the total sales it generates or to how much capital is invested in it. Hence, an assessment or a judgment is made based on making some sort of comparison. Extending the example

Company A Company B

NET PROFIT 10000 100000

SALES 200000 500000

NET WORTH (CAPITAL RESERVE) 100000 200000

If net profit is compared with Sales, an assessment can be made on which company generates the most net profit per Re.1 received from customers.

Return on Capital Employed:

Company A Company B

Net Profit / Sales * 100 5 % 20 %

Net Profit / Net Worth * 100 10 % 25%

Ratio can be expressed in the following three forms:

1. As proportion

2. As percentage

3. As turnover rate

Simple or pure ratio is merely a quotient arrived by simple division of one number by another. When the current assets of a business firm are Rs. 60,000 and current liabilities is Rs. 15,000

· The ratio is derived by dividing Rs. 60,000 by Rs. 15,000. It will be expressed as 4:1

· Ratios are expressed as percentage relations when the simple or pure ratios are multiplied by 100. (4 x 100 = 400 %)

Page 149: smu account assignment solved

· Ratios are expressed as rates which refer to ratios over a period of time. Example: Stock has turned over 6 times a year

Ratio Analysis is “separation or breaking up of anything into its elements or component parts”. Ratio analysis is therefore a technique of analysis and interpreting various ratios for helping in making certain decisions. It involves the methods of calculating and interpreting financial ratios to assess the firm’s performance and status. The ratio analysis is one of the most powerful tools of financial analysis. The analysis is not restricted to any one aspect but takes into account all aspects such as earning capacity of the firm, financial obligation, liquidity and solvency aspects, liquidity and profitability concepts.

8.3 Steps in Ratio Analysis

Ratio analysis can provide you with this information in three steps:

1. Calculate the firm’s ratios for the current or recent period. Ratios are calculated from the firm’s income statement or balance sheet. It is helpful and sometimes necessary to have the financial statement independently audited.

2. Compare these ratios to those calculated in past records. The purpose of this comparison is to identify tendencies in the firm’s ratios. This is known as trend analysis.

3. Compare the ratios to industry averages to show how the company compares to firms of the same size in its industry. This process is known as Cross-sectional analysis.

Self Assessment Questions:

1. Analysis of performance between two companies can be made using ratios. State true or false.

2. Ratios can be expressed in three forms _____________,____________ and _____________.

3. ‘Stock has turned over 3 times a year’ – the ratio is expressed as ________________

8.4 Classification of Ratios

A. Liquidity Ratios: It is the ability of a firm to satisfy its short term obligations as they become due for payment. The liquidity is a prerequisite for the very survival of a firm. It reflects the short term financial strength or solvency of the firm. The ratios which indicate the liquidity of the firm are:

Page 150: smu account assignment solved

1. Net Working Capital

2. Current Ratios

3. Acid test/Quick ratio

4. Super quick ratio

5. Cash flow from operations ratio

1. Net Working Capital: It represents the excess of current assets over current liabilities.

Net working capital = Current Assets – Current Liabilities

Although NWC is really not a ratio, it is frequently employed as a measure of a company’s liquidity position. The greater is the amount of NWC, the greater is the liquidity of the firm. Inadequate working capital is the first sign of financial problems for a firm.

2. Current Ratio: It is the ratio of total current assets to total current liabilities.

· The Current assets of a firm include cash and bank balances, marketable securities, inventory of raw materials, semi-finished and finished goods, debtors net of provision for bad and doubtful debts, bills receivable and prepaid expenses.

· The Current liabilities include trade creditors, bills payable, bank credit, provision for taxation dividends payable and outstanding expenses.

· As a measure of short term financial liquidity, it indicates the rupees of current assets available for each rupee of current liability payable.

· Higher ratio, i.e., more than 2:1 indicates sound solvency position but at the same time it may be indicative of slack management policies and practices as it might signal excessive inventories or poor credit management.

· Lower ratio i.e., less than 2:1 indicates inadequate working capital. In capital rich countries, where long-term funds from capital market are available in abundance firms dependence on current liabilities may be less. For public utility companies such as BSNL, MTNL current ratio is usually very low as they required fewer current assets.

3. Quick Ratio: Quick ratio is also known as liquid ratio or acid test ratio. One defect of the current ratio is that it fails to convey any information on the composition of the current assets of the firm. A rupee of cash is considered equivalent to a rupee of inventory or receivable which

Page 151: smu account assignment solved

may not be so. The acid test ratio is a measure of liquidity designed to overcome this defect by measuring those current assets that can be quickly converted into cash to meet the short term obligations of current liabilities. In a way it excludes inventory that are not easily and readily converted into cash.

· Acid test ratio of 1:1 is considered satisfactory. This ratio is a more rigorous and penetrating test of the liquidity position of a firm.

· Higher ratio i.e., more than 1:1 indicates sound financial position.

· Lower ratio, i.e., less than 1:1 indicates financial difficulty.

4. Super quick / Cash ratio: This ratio is calculated by dividing the super quick assets by the current liabilities of a firm. The super quick current assets are cash and marketable securities. This ratio is the most rigorous and conservative test of a firm’s liquidity position.

5. Cash flow from Operations Ratio: This ratio measures liquidity of a firm by comparing actual cash flows from operations (in lieu of current and potential cash inflows from current assets) with current liability.

Illustration 1: Given: Current Ratio is 2.5 and working capital is Rs.1, 80,000. Calculate the Current Assets and current liabilities.

Solution:

Current Ratio = CA / CL

2.5 = CA /1

CA = 2.5 (In the absence of any value, the current liability is always taken as 1 unit)

Working Capital = CA – CL

= 2.5 – 1

Working Capital = 1.5

Page 152: smu account assignment solved

For 1.5 WCR = Rs.1,80,000 ( Working Capital value)

For 2.5 CAR, = Rs.1,80,000 x 2.5 / 1.5

1. Current Assets = Rs.3,00,000

For 1.0 CLR = Rs. 1,80,000 x 2.5 / 1

2. Current Liabilities = Rs.1,20,000

Illustration 2: Given Current ratio 1.5 :1; Quick ratio 1 : 1 and Current liabilities Rs.50,000. Calculate current assets, quick assets and inventory.

Solution:

1. Current Ratio = 1. 5 : 1 [ CA / CL]

Current liabilities = Rs.50,000

Current Ratio (1.5) = CA / 50,000

Current Assets = Rs.75,000

2. Quick Assets ( QR) = QA / 1 [ QA/CL]

1 = QA / 50,000

Quick Assets = Rs.50,000

3. Inventory = CA – QA

= Rs.75,000 – Rs.50,000

Inventory = Rs.25,000

B. Solvency / Capital structure Ratios

The long-term lenders/creditors would judge the soundness of a firm on the basis of the long-term financial strength measured in terms of its ability to pay the interest regularly as well as repay the installment of the principal on due dates or in one lump sum at the time of maturity. There are two aspects of the long term solvency of a firm: (i) the ability to repay the principal when due and (ii) regular payment of the interest. Accordingly there are two different but mutually dependent and interrelated types of leverage ratios.

Page 153: smu account assignment solved

Balance sheet ratios Capital Structure ratios

Debt – Equity ratio

Debt- asset ratio

Equity- asset/Proprietor’s fund ratio

Interest coverage ratios

Dividend coverage ratios

Total fixed charges coverage ratios

Cash flow coverage ratios

Debt services coverage ratios

1. Debt Equity Ratio: The relationship between borrowed funds and owner’s capital is known as debt-equity ratio. This ratio reflects the relative claims of creditors and shareholders against the assets of the firm. Debt-equity ratio is calculated a

The D/E ratio is an important tool to appraise the financial structure of a firm. The ratio reflects the relative contribution of creditors and owners of business in its financing. If D/E ratio is 1:2 it implies that for every rupee of outside liability (debt) the firm has two rupees of owner’s capital or the stake of the creditors is one-half of the owners. Therefore a safety margin of 66.67 per cent is available to the creditors of the firm. A higher debt-equity ratio say 2:1 implies low safety margin to the creditors. It would lead to inflexibility in the firm’s operation.

Treatment of Preference Share Capital in D/E ratio: The inclusion or exclusion of preference share capital depends upon the purpose for which the D/E ratio is computed. If the objective is to examine the financial solvency of a firm in terms of its ability to avoid financial risk, preference capital should be clubbed with equity capital. On the other hand, if D/E ratio is calculated to show the effect of the use of fixed-interest/dividend sources of funds on the earnings available to the ordinary shareholders, preference capital should be clubbed with debt.

Trading on Equity: A high debt-equity ratio denotes the use of larger proportion of debt capital in the financial structure of the firm. The debt capital is cheaper to equity capital because interest on debt is a tax deductible expense. The equity shareholders stands to gain for two reasons (i) Higher returns (ii) Limited stake would be enable them to retain control. Trading on equity or leverage is the use of borrowed funds in expectation of higher returns to equity shareholders.

Debt Asset Ratio: It measures the share of total assets financed by outside funds.

Page 154: smu account assignment solved

· A low ratio of debt to total assets is desirable from the point of creditors/lenders as there is sufficient margin of safety available to them.

· A high ratio would expose the creditors to high risk. The implications of the ratio of equity capital to total capital are exactly opposite to that of the debt to total assets. A firm should have neither a very high ratio nor a very low ratio.

2. Proprietary Ratio: This ratio indicates the proportion of total assets financed by the owners.

· Higher ratio, say more than 75% shows lesser dependence on external sources.

· Lower ratio, say less than 60% shows more dependence on external sources.

3. Capital Gearing Ratio: It shows the mix of finance employed in the firm.

Important Concepts

Equity Capital = Loan Capital = Even Gear

Equity Capital > Loan Capital = Low Gear = Over Capitalization

Equity Capital < Loan Capital = Higher Gear = Under Capitalization

4. Coverage Ratios: These ratios measure the firm’s ability to pay certain fixed charges. In the ordinary course of business, the obligations of the creditors are met out of the earnings or operating profits. These claims consist of (i) interest on loans, (ii) preference dividend and (iii) amortization of principal or repayment of the installment of loans or redemption of preference capital on maturity. The important coverage ratios are (i) interest coverage (ii) dividend coverage (iii) total coverage (iv) total cash flow coverage (v) debt service coverage ratio.

5. Interest Coverage: This ratio measures the firm’s ability to make contractual interest payments.

An interest coverage of five times indicates that a fall in EBIT level to one-fifth of the present level, the operating profits available for servicing the interest on loan would still be equivalent to

Page 155: smu account assignment solved

the claims of the lenders. From the lender’s point of view higher the coverage, better is the position of long-term creditors. It also highlights the ability of the firm to raise additional funds in future.

6. Dividend Coverage: It measures the ability of a firm to pay dividend on preference shares which carry a stated rate of return. Higher the coverage better is the position.

7. Debt Service Coverage Ratio: It is considered a more comprehensive and apt measure to compute debt service capacity of the firm. It is the ability of a firm to make the contractual payments required on a scheduled basis over the life of the debt.

The higher the ratio, the better it is. A ratio of less than one may be taken as a sign of long term solvency problem as it indicates that the firm does not generate enough cash internally to service debt. Financial Institutions consider 2:1 as satisfactory ratio.

Illustration 3: The Balance Sheet of Dravid Ltd is as follows :

Calculate the Debt Ratio and Debt-equity ratio.

Solution:

1. Debt Ratio = Total Liabilities to outsiders / Total assets

= (Debentures + Trade creditors )/(Fixed + current assets)

= (2,00,000 + 1,00,000) / (10,00,000 + 5,00,000)

Page 156: smu account assignment solved

= 3,00,000 / 15,00,000

= 1:5

2. Debt – Equity Ratio = Outsiders’ funds / shareholders’ equity or

=

=

= 3,00,000 / 12,00,000

= 1 : 4

C. Profitability Ratio: The management of the firm is interested in the financial soundness of a firm. They are designed to provide answers to questions such as (i) is the profit earned by the firm adequate? (ii) What rate of return does it represent? (iii) What is the rate of profit for various divisions and segments of the firm? (iv)What was the amount paid in dividends? (v) What was the amount paid in dividends? (vi) What is the rate of return to equity-holders?

1. Gross Profit Margin: It measures the percentage of each sales rupee remaining after the firm has paid for its goods. The gross profit margin or gross margin measures the relationship between profit and sales. There are two types of margins- gross profit margin and net profit margin

A high ratio of gross profit to sales is a sign of good management as it implies that the cost of production is relatively low. A relatively low gross margin is definitely a danger signal, a need for careful and detailed analysis of the factors responsible for it.

2. Net Profit Margin: This measures the relationship between net profits and sales of a firm. It measures the percentage of each sales rupee remaining after all costs and expenses including interest and taxes have been deducted.

Page 157: smu account assignment solved

The net profit margin is indicative of management’s ability to operate the business with sufficient success not only to recover all the cost but also to leave a margin of reasonable compensation to the owners. Higher the ratio of net operating profit to sales better is the operational efficiency of the concern.

3. Expenses Ratio: These ratios indicate the relationship of various expenses to net sales. It is computed by dividing expenses by sales. Operating expenses include cost of goods sold, administrative expenses, selling, distribution expense and financial expenses but excludes taxes, dividends and extraordinary losses.

Cost of Goods Sold = Opening Stock + Purchase – Closing Stock

Operating Expenses = Administrative Expenses + Financial Expenses +

Selling Expenses

The expenses ratio should be compared over a period of time with the industry average. A low ratio is preferable to high one is unfavorable. For manufacturing concern an operating ratio between 75% and 80% is expected.

4. Return on Capital Employed: It refers to long term funds supplied by the lenders and owners of the firm. The capital employed provides a test of profitability related to the source of long-term funds. A comparison of this ratio with similar firms, with the industry average and over time would provide sufficient insight into how efficiently the long term funds of owners and lenders are being used.

The higher the ratio, the more efficient use of the capital employed and better is the financial position.

5. Return on Shareholders’ Equity: It measures the return on the total equity funds of ordinary shareholders. This ratio judges whether the firm has earned a satisfactory return for its equity holders or not.

Illustration 4: Ranjandas Ltd provides the following information.

Page 158: smu account assignment solved

Cash Sales Rs.8,00,000; Credit Sales Rs.10,00,000;

COGS Rs.15,80,000 and Return Inwards Rs.20,000.

Calculate Gross Profit Ratio and ratio of COGS.

Solution

Gross Sales = Cash Sales + Credit Sales

= 8,00,000 + 10,00,000

= 18,00,000

Net Sales = Gross Sales – Return Inwards

= 18,00,000 – 20,000

= 17,80,000

Gross Profit = Net Sales – COGS

= 17,80,000 – 15,80,000

= 2,00,000

1. Gross Profit Ratio = (Gross Profit / Net Sales) x 100

= [2,00,000 / 17,80,000] x 100

= 11.2 %

1. Ratio of COGS = 100 – GP ratio

= 100 -11.2

= 88.8%

D. Activity Ratios or Efficiency Ratios: They are concerned with measuring the efficiency in asset management. The efficiency with which the assets are used would be reflected in the speed and rapidity with which assets are converted into sales.

1. Turnover Ratio: This ratio examines how quickly inventory is converted into cash. This ratio helps the financial manager to evaluate in inventory policy. The ratio reveals the number of times finished stock is turned over during a given accounting period. The three relevant turnover ratios

Page 159: smu account assignment solved

are (i) Inventory turnover ratio (ii) Debtors turnover ratio (iii) Creditors turnover ratio.

To judge whether the ratio of a firm is satisfactory or not, it should be compared over a time on the basis of trend analysis.

2. Debtor’s Turnover Ratio: It is determined by dividing the net credit sales by average debtors outstanding during the year.

· Net Credit sales consist of gross credit sales minus returns from customers. It also includes bills receivables.

· A high ratio is indicative of shorter time lag between credit sales and cash collection.

· A low ratio indicates that debts are not being collected rapidly.

· Debt collection period is calculated by any of the following ratios:

The higher the turnover Ratio and the shorter the average collection period, indicates better trade credit management and the better the liquidity of debtors.

3. Creditors Turnover Ratio: It is the ratio between net credit purchase and the average amount of creditors outstanding during the year.

A higher ratio shows that the creditors are not paid in time.

Page 160: smu account assignment solved

A lower ratio shows that the business is not taking the full advantage of credit period allowed by the creditors.

4. Assets Turnover Ratio: It indicates the efficiency with which firm uses all its assets to generate sales. It is based on the relationship between cost of goods sold and assets of a firm.

The total assets and fixed assets are net of depreciation and the assets are exclusive of fictitious assets. Higher the ratio, greater is the intensive utilization of fixed assets. Lower ratio means under utilization of total and fixed assets.

5. Capital Turnover Ratio:

Lower ratio shows lower profit and higher ratio shows higher profit.

Illustration 5: Birla Cements Ltd provides the following

Stock: Opening Rs.75,000; Closing Rs.1,00,000.

Credit Sales Rs.2,00,000. Cash Sales Rs. 50,000. Gross Profit 25 %.

Calculate the Inventory Turnover Ratio

Solution:

Net Sales = Cash Sales + Credit Sales

= 2,00,000 + 50,000

= 2,50,000

Gross Profit = 25% of 2,50,000 ( Net Sales)

= 62,500

COGS = Net Sales – Gross Profit

= 2,50,000 – 62,500

Page 161: smu account assignment solved

= 1,87,500

Average Inventory = (Opening + Closing stock) / 2

= (75,000 + 1,00,000)/2

= 87,500

Inventory Turnover Ratio = COGS / Average Inventory

= 1,87,500 / 87,500

= 2.14 times

Illustration 6: Total sales of a firm Rs.5,00,000 of which the credit sales are Rs.3,65,000. Sundry Debtors and Bills receivable are Rs.50,000 and Rs.2,000 respectively. Calculate the Debtors Velocity.

Solution:

Debtors Turnover Ratio = Net Credit Sales / (Debtors + Bills Receivables)

= 3,65,000/ (50000 + 2000)

= 7.02

Debtors’ Velocity = No. of days in a year / Debtors turnover ratio

(Debtors collection period) = 365/7.02

= 52 days

Note: No. of days in a year is taken as 365 days.

Illustration 7: Total purchases Rs.1,00,000. Cash purchases Rs.20,000. Discount Provision on creditors Rs.1,000. Purchase returns Rs.2,000. Creditors at close Rs.30,000. Bills payable at close Rs.25,000. Calculate Creditors Velocity.

Solution:

Page 162: smu account assignment solved

Credit purchases = Total purchase – cash purchase – purchase return

= 1,00,000 – 20,000 – 2,000

= Rs.78,000

Creditors Turnover Ratio =

= 78000 / (30000 + 25000)

= 1.42

Creditor’s Velocity =

(Crs collection period) = 365 /1.42

= 257 days

Note: The Reserve for discount on creditors should not be considered for calculating the net credit sales.

E. Integrated Ratios: We have dealt with various ratios and their effect on firm’s liquidity, solvency, efficiency and profitability independently. However there exist interrelationships among these ratios. The overall profitability of a firm can be accessed on the basis of a combination of earning power and return on assets ratio. The earning power of a firm is the overall profitability of a firm and it is computed by multiplying the net profit margin and the asset turnover. The earning power of a firm is portrayed in Du Pont Chart.

Self Assessment Questions:

4. For capital rich countries, the current ratio is usually ________

5. In quick ratio _________ and ___________ are excluded because they cannot be readily converted into cash.

6. ___________ ratio is the most rigorous and conservative test of all liquidity ratios

7. ___________ ratio reflects the relative contribution of creditors and owners of the business in its financing

8. In debt equity ratio if the objective is to examine the financing solvency of the firm preference share capital is _________.

Page 163: smu account assignment solved

9. ___________ is the use of borrowed funds is to enhance higher returns to equity shareholders.

10. ___________ is the ability of a firm to make the contractual payments required on a scheduled basis over the life of the debt.

11. A high debtors turnover ratio indicates ____ time lag between credit sales and cash collection.

12. ______________is indicative of management’s ability to operate the business with sufficient success not only to recover all the cost but also to leave a margin of reasonable compensation to the owners.

13. _______________ is based on the relationship between cost of goods sold and assets of a firm.

8.5 Du Pont Chart

Return on Investments represents the earning power of the company. It depends on Net profit ratio and capital turnover ratio. A change in any of these ratios will change the firm’s earning capacity. This chart shows how the return on capital employed is affected by various factors such as cost of goods sold, change in working capital, change in selling and administrative expenses etc. This chart helps the management in detecting the core issues that confront the management and it helps in effective use of capital.

8.6 Solved Problems

Problem 1: The income statement of Vignesh Ltd is as follows:

Page 164: smu account assignment solved

Calculate the Gross Profit Ratio, Net Profit Ratio, Operating Ratio, Operating Profit Ratio and Expense Ratio.

Solution

1. Gross Profit Ratio = Gross Profit / Net Sales x 100

= 2,00,000 / 12,00,000 x 100

= 16.67 %

2. Net Profit ratio = Net Profit after tax / Net Sales x 100

= 80,000 / 12,00,000 x 100

= 6.67%

COGS = Sales – Gross Profit

= 12,00,000 – 2,00,000

= 10,00,000

3. Operating Ratio = COGS + operating expenses / Net Sales x 100

= 10,00,000+(1,00,000+80,000) / 12,00,000 x 100

= 98.33 %

4. Operating Profit Ratio = 100 – 98.33%

= 1.67 %

5. Expenses Ratio = Operating Expenses/Net sales x 100

= 1,80,000/ 12,00,000 x 100

= 15.00 %

Page 165: smu account assignment solved

Illustration 2: The capital structure of M/s NDW and M/s GDF Ltd are as follows:

Solution:

Capital Gearing Ratio = Fixed Income bearing Securities / Total Equity

NDW = 3,00,000/ 12,00,000

= 0.25

GDF = 6,00,000/ 8,00,000

= 0.75

The capital of NDW is low geared when compared to GDF.

Illustration 3: The capital structure of Arvind Ltd is as follows:

Equity Share Capital 10,00,000

Redeemable Preference Capital 5,00,000

6 % Debentures 3,00,000

Long term liabilities 2,00,000

Reserves and surplus 2,00,000

Calculate the Capital Gearing Ratio and Ratio of Total Investment to Long-term liabilities

Solution:

Capital Gearing Ratio = Fixed Cost bearing securities / Total Capital

= 10,00,000 / 12,00,000

= 0.83 : 1

Total Investment to LTL = Total Liabilities / Long term liabilities

= 22,00,000 / 10,00,000

Page 166: smu account assignment solved

= 2.2 :1

Illustration 4: From the following information provided Sarawath Ltd draw up the Balance Sheet.

a. Current Ratio : 2.50

b. Liquidity Ratio : 1.50

c. Net Working Capital : Rs.300000

d. Stock Turnover Ratio : 6 times

e. Ratio of Gross Profit to Sales : 20%

f. Fixed Asset Turnover Ratio : 2 times

g. Average Debt collection period : 2 Months

h. Fixed Assets to Net Worth : 0.80

i. Reserve and Surplus to Capital : 0.50

Working Notes

Page 167: smu account assignment solved

8.7 Advantages of Ratio Analysis

The various advantages of ratio analysis are as follows:

a) Financial Forecasting and Planning: Ratio analysis helps in the financial forecasting and planning activities. Ratios based on the past sales are useful in planning the financial position. Based on these future trends are set.

b) Decision Making: Ratio analysis throws light on the degree of efficiency. It is also concerned with the management and utilization of the assets. Thus, it enables for making strategic decisions.

c) Comparison: With the help of ratio analysis, ideal ratios can be composed. These can be used for comparison in respect of the firm’s progress and performance, inter-firm comparison with industry average.

d) Financial Solvency: It indicates the trends in the financial solvency of the firm. Long term solvency refers to the financial liability of a firm. It can also evaluate the short term liquidity position of the firm. .

e) Communication

The financial strength and weaknesses of a firm are communicated in a more easy and understandable manner by the use of ratios. The information contained in the financial statements is conveyed in a meaningful manner. It thus helps in the communication and enhances the value of the financial statements.

f) Efficiency Evaluation

It evaluates the overall efficiency of the business entity. Ratio analysis is an effective instrument which, when properly used, is useful to assess important characteristics of business liquidity, solvency, profitability. A critical study of these aspects may enable conclusions relating to capabilities of business.

Page 168: smu account assignment solved

g) Control

It helps in making effective control of the business. Actual results can be compared with the established standard and to take corrective action at the right time.

h) Other uses

Financial ratios are very helpful in the early and proper diagnosis and financial health of the firm.

8.8 Limitations of Ratio Analysis

Undoubtedly, ratios are precious tools in the hands of the analyst. But its significance comes from proper use of these ratios. Misuse or mishandling of these ratios and using them without proper context may lead the analyst or management to a wrong direction. The limiting factors are:

1. The user should possess the practical knowledge about the concerns and the industry in general.

2. Ratios are not an end. They are only means to an end.

3. A single ratio in itself is not important. The trend is more significant in the analysis. Comparison of ratios should be made.

4. For comparative purposes, there should be a standard ratio. There are no such standards prescribed for the ratios.

5. The accuracy and correctness of ratios are totally dependent upon the reliability of the data contained in the financial statement on the basis of which ratios are calculated.

6. To use ratios, first of all there should be uniformity in the accounting plan used by both the firms. In addition. There must be consistency in the preparation of financial statement and recording the transactions from year to year within that concern.

7. Ratios become meaningless if detached from the details from which they are derived. The should be used as supplementary and not substitution of the original absolute figures.

8. Time lag in calculation and communicating the same should not be unnecessarily too much.

9. The method of presentation should be precise and without any ambiguity.

10. Price level changes make the ratio analysis meaningless.

11. Inter-firm comparison should never be undertaken in the case of concerns which are not associated or comparable.

Page 169: smu account assignment solved

12. All techniques concerning the ratio analysis should be taken into account.

8.9 Summary

Ratio Analysis is “separation or breaking up of anything into its elements or component parts”. Ratio analysis is therefore a technique of analysis and interpreting various ratios for helping in making certain decisions. It involves the methods of calculating and interpreting financial ratios to assess the firm’s performance and status Ratios are calculated from the firm’s income statement or balance sheet. It is helpful and sometimes necessary to have the financial statement independently audited. Ratios are compared with past records. The purpose of this comparison is to identify tendencies in the firm’s ratios. This is known as trend analysis. Ratios are classified into liquidity, solvency, profitability, activity and integrated ratios.

8.10 Terminal questions

Problem 1:

Calculate Current ratio, acid test ratio from the following information:

Cash in hand Rs.3,000. Cash at Bank Rs.65,000. Bills receivable Rs.10,000. Stock Rs.1,20,000, Debtors Rs.80,000. Prepaid expenses Rs.2,000. Creditors Rs.1,20,000. Bills payable Rs.20,000.

Problem 2:

Calculate Debt equity Ratio and Proprietary ratio from the following information:

Problem 3: The current assets and current liabilities were Rs.16,00,000 and Rs.8,00,000 respectively. What is the effect of each of the following transactions individually and totally on the current ratio:

1. Purchase of new machinery for Rs.5,00,000

2. Purchase of new machinery for Rs.10,00,000 on a medium term loan from a bank with 20 % margin.

3. Payment of a dividend of Rs.2,00,000 of which Rs.0.47 lakh was tax deducted at source.

4. Materials purchased costing Rs.5,00,000 in respect of which bank financed Rs.3,00,000.

Problem 4:

Page 170: smu account assignment solved

The current ratio is 2:1. Which of the following suggestions would improve the ratio, which would reduce it and which would not change it?

a) to pay a current liability

b) to sell a motor car for cash at a slight loss

c) to borrow money for short time on an interest bearing promissory note

d) to purchase stock for cash

e) to give an interest bearing promissory note to a creditor to whom money was to be paid.

8.11 Answer for SAQ’s and TQ’s

Activity 1: Solution

Debtors Turnover Ratio = Net Credit Sales / (Debtors + Bills Receivables)

= 3,65,000/ (50000 + 2000)

= 7.02

Debtors’ Velocity = No. of days in a year / Debtors turnover ratio

(Debtors collection period) = 365/7.02

= 52 days

Note: No. of days in a year is taken as 365 days.

Activity 2: Solution:

Credit purchases = Total purchase – cash purchase – purchase return

= 1,00,000 – 20,000 – 2,000

Page 171: smu account assignment solved

= Rs.78,000

Creditors Turnover Ratio = Net credit purchases / (Creditors + Bills Payable)

= 78000 / (30000 + 25000)

= 1.42

Creditor’s Velocity = No. of days in a year / Creditors turnover ratio

(Creditors collection period) = 365 /1.42

= 257 days

Note: The Reserve for discount on creditors should not be considered for calculating the net credit sales.

Copyright © 2009 SMU

Powered by Sikkim Manipal University

Page 172: smu account assignment solved

MB0041-Unit-09- Funds Flow Analysis

Unit-09- Funds Flow Analysis

Structure:

9.1 Introduction

Objective

9.2 Meaning of Funds Flow Statement

9.3 Ascertainment of flow of funds

9.4 Technique of preparing funds flow statement

9.5 Schedule of Changes in Working Capital

9.6 Adjusted Profit and Loss account

9.7 Funds Flow Statement

9.8 Summary

9.9 Terminal questions

9.10 Answers to SAQs and TQs

9.1 Introduction

Financial statements as an aid to evaluate past and / or present performance of a business concern is unquestionable and beyond any dispute. The Income Statement reports the revenues earned and expenses incurred or outstanding. The Balance Sheet conveys about the deployment of funds in various assets and equities. International Accounting Standards 7 reads as:

“A statement of changes in financial position should be included as an integral part of financial statements. The statement of changes in financial position should be presented for each period for which the income statement is prepared”. The inclusion of such a statement, therefore, is very helpful to improve the understanding of the operations and activities of an enterprise for the reporting period.

Objectives:

Page 173: smu account assignment solved

After studying this unit you should be able to:

1. Explain the meaning and the concepts of funds flow statement.

2. Ascertain transactions that involve flow of funds and those that does not involve flow of funds.

3. Know the techniques of preparing fund flow statement.

9.2 Meaning of Fund Flow Statement

Funds Flow Statement is essentially derived from the analysis of changes which have occurred in assets and equities between two accounting periods. Funds Flow Statement being a toll of Management accountant can be prepared at point in time. This statement does not form a part of financial statement but acts as a valuable tool for the management in decision making.

Funds flow statement is very useful in working capital management, deciding the capital structure of the firm, financial planning and forecasting.

According to the International Accounting Standard 7, the term ‘Fund’ refers to cash, to cash and cash equivalent, or to working capital. The term ‘flow’ refers to change and therefore the term ‘Funds flow” refers to ‘change in funds’ or ‘change in working capital’. In other words, any increase or decrease in working capital means ‘flow of funds’.

Fund Flow Statement enables us to identify and recognize the changes in assets and asset sources which are not readily evident in the income statement or financial statement. It reveals how funds were obtained to pay off its long term debts, how the firm managed to pay regular dividends during volatile period, how the funds from equity issue were utilized etc.

However Funds flow statement is not a substitute to comprehensive income statement (Profit and Loss account) and statement of Financial Position (Balance Sheet). It facilitates additional information regarding movement of funds during a particular period.

There are two concepts of working capital – gross concept and net concept.

Gross working capital refers to the firm’s investment in current assets. Net working capital means excess of current assets over current liabilities.

Current assets are those which are held or receivable within a year or within the operating cycle of the business. They are intended to be converted into cash within a short period of time.

Current liability is that obligation which has to be satisfied within a year. Examples of current assets and current liabilities are:

Page 174: smu account assignment solved

CURRENT ASSETS CURRENT LIABILITIES

· Cash and bank balances

· Inventory

· Sundry Debtors

· Temporary investments

· Pre-paid expenses

· Outstanding incomes

· Accounts receivables

· Bills receivables

· Accounts payable

· Sundry creditors

· Bank overdraft

· Unclaimed dividends

· Provision for taxation

· Proposed dividends

· Short term loans

Non-Current Assets refers to those assets other than current assets that are realizable in cash or sold or consumable after one year or after a considerable period of time. Fictitious assets are those expenses which could not be written off during the period of their incidence. For example, promotional expenses of a company which could not be treated as expenditure in the year of incidence are shown as fictitious asset.

Non-current Liabilities refers to all those obligations other than current liabilities that are likely to mature after one year period. Examples of non-current asset and non-current liabilities are:

NON CURRENT LIABILITIES

NON CURRENT ASSETS

· Share capital

· Long term loans

· Debentures

· Share premium a/c

· Forfeited shares a/c

· Profit & loss a/c (credit bal)

· Appropriation of profits

· Fixed assets

· Fictitious assets like goodwill, patents, copyrights, trademarks.

· Long term investments

· Profit & loss a/c (debit bal)

· Discount on issue of shares & debentures

· Deferred expenditures like preliminary expenses, advertising expenses.

Page 175: smu account assignment solved

· Provision for taxation

· Provision for depreciation

· Capital reserve

Statement of Sources and Uses of Funds or Funds Flow Statement is a statement which depicts the sources from which funds are obtained and how they have been utilized. When a transaction results in increase of funds it is termed as “Source of Fund” and when it results in decrease of fund it is termed as “Application of Fund”.

However there are certain transactions that do not result in either increase or decrease of fund. Such transactions are termed as Non fund Transaction. Eg: If the funds are Rs.10000 and a fixed asset of Rs.5000 is purchased by issuing shares of Rs.5000 the funds position will not change and therefore this transaction will be taken as a non-fund transaction.

There are certain transactions which are not apparent and are hidden. Such transactions have to be located in order to know their effect on the funds. In such circumstances the relevant ledger accounts should be prepared for all non-current assets and liabilities to find out the hidden information.

Self Assessment Questions:

5. Flow of Funds refers to change in funds or ________________

6. ____ Working Capital refers to the firm’s investment in current assets

7. __________ are those expenses which could not be written off during the period of their incidence

8. When a transaction results in decrease of funds it is termed as ___________________.

9.3 Ascertainment of Flow of Funds

The flow of fund can be ascertained from Balance Sheet, Profit and Loss account and from the hidden information. A few independent transactions are given below and the effect of each of the transaction on flow of funds is determined.

Page 176: smu account assignment solved

Computation of Working capital:

1. The company realizes Rs.20000 from its debtors.

Debtors will reduce from Rs.80000 to Rs.60000

Cash balance will increase from Rs. 20000 to Rs.40000

2. The company pays to its creditors a sum of Rs.10000 out of the cash balance.

· Cash balance gets reduced from Rs.20,000 to Rs.10,000

· Sundry creditors will stand reduced from Rs.50,000 to Rs.40,000

3. The company purchases furniture of Rs.10000 by raising long-term loans of Rs.10000.

Page 177: smu account assignment solved

4. The company redeems preference shares of Rs.100000 by issuing 12% debentures of Rs.100000.

5. The company raises Rs.50,000 in cash by issue of new shares.

· This transaction will increase the cash balance of the company from

Rs.20,000 to Rs.70,000. The working capital position will be:

6. The company sells its building having a book value of Rs.50,000 for a sum of Rs.60,000.

· This transaction will increase the cash balance with the company from Rs.20,000 to Rs.80,000.

Note: Each transaction is independent and not linked to the previous example.

From the above, the following general rules can be formed:

1. There will be flow of funds if a transaction involves:

· Current assets and fixed assets, e.g. purchase of building for cash

· Current assets and capital, e.g., issue of shares for cash

· Current assets and fixed liabilities, e.g. redemption of debentures in cash

· Current liabilities and fixed liabilities, e.g. Creditors paid off in debentures

· Current liabilities and capital, e.g., creditors paid off in shares.

Page 178: smu account assignment solved

· Current liabilities and fixed assets, e.g. building transferred to creditors in satisfaction of their claims

2. There will be no flow of funds if a transaction involves.

· Current assets and current liabilities, e.g., payment made to creditors through cash

· Fixed assets and fixed liabilities, e.g., building purchased and payments made in debentures.

· Fixed assets and capital, e.g. building purchased and payment made in shares

Self Assessment Questions:

5. When cash is collected from debtors there is flow of funds. State true or false.

6. When there is sale of fixed assets and cash is obtained there is flow of funds since it involves non-current asset and current asset. State true or false.

7. X Ltd transfers Rs.10 lakhs of its profits to Redemption Reserve account. Does it involve flow of funds? State yes or no

8. Y Ltd writes off goodwill during the current accounting period. This transaction involves flow of funds. State true or false.

9. A firm accepts bills payable drawn by its creditors. Will transaction have effect on flow of funds? Why?

10. Give one transaction which involves one current liability and noncurrent liability.

11. Give one transaction which involves one current liability and noncurrent asset.

Page 179: smu account assignment solved

9.4 Techniques of Preparing a Funds Flow Statement

Like other accounting statements, the structure of Fund Flow Statement is based on the equality of financial assets and liabilities including capital. The basic understanding is that the funds are obtained through profit, external borrowings or by issue of shares. If funds are not available readily from these sources, the other alternative available is to sell the fixed assets and investments.

Steps in Preparation of Funds Flow Statement

There are three steps involved in the preparation of a Fund Flow Statement (FFS). They are as follows:

a) Preparation of Statement of changes in working capital or Schedule of changes in working capital.

b) Preparation of Adjusted Profit and Loss Account (APL)

c) Statement of changes in Financial position as per AS – 7

9.5 Schedule of Changes in Working Capital

It is also known as “Comparative change in Working Capital Statement” or “Working Capital Variation Statement”. The net change in working capital is projected here in the place of individual changes in all the current assets and current liabilities in the Funds Flow Statement. The statement indicates the amount of working capital at the end of two years. It shows the increase or decrease in the individual items of current assets and current liabilities.

The effect of the changes in the individual items of the current assets and current liabilities on working capital is also presented clearly and precisely. The difference in the amount of working capital at the end of two years will depict either the increase or decrease in working capital. While ascertaining the increase or decrease in individual items of current assets and current liabilities and its impact on working capital, the following Rules should be taken into account.

Rules for preparing the Schedule of Changes in Working Capital:

Page 180: smu account assignment solved

Format of Schedule of Changes in Working Capital

*Provision for Taxation: It can be treated in two ways:

1. Treated as current liability: when there is no income tax paid or additional provision made it is treated as current liability. It can be taken to schedule of changes in working capital. No further treatment is required.

2. Treated as non-current liability: A ledger account (Provision for taxation a/c) is prepared. Sometimes we may have to arrive at income tax paid during the year from the given information. These are hidden transactions which are not apparent and are hidden.

*Proposed Dividend: It can be treated in two ways:

1. Treated as current liability: Proposed dividend may be taken as Current liability since declaration of dividends by share holders is simply a formality. It is taken to schedule of changes in working capital with no further treatment.

2. Treated as non-current liability: Proposed dividend can be taken as an appropriation of profit. In such a case, proposed dividend for the current year will be added back to current year’s profit in order to find out funds from operations if such amount of dividend has already been charged to profit. Payment of dividend will be shown as an application of fund.

9.6 Adjusted Profit and Loss account

Revenue transactions such as depreciation, amortization, Profit/Loss on sale of assets etc appearing in Profit and Loss account does not belong to either current or non-current category. All such non-operating incomes and non-operating expenses appear in Adjusted Profit and Loss account to ascertain the ‘Funds from Operations”.

Funds from Operations: Profit earned by the concern during the current year is deemed to be the source of funds. It is very important source of funds inflow. Net profit is arrived at by

Page 181: smu account assignment solved

deducting cost of goods sold and other expenses from total sales revenue. However, the profit so calculated is seldom equal to the funds from operations because there are many items which are debited or credited in the Profit and Loss Account which do not affect working capital. Therefore, in calculating the funds from operations, the following adjustments must be kept in mind:

Items to be added back to Net Profit:

a. Non-fund revenue deductions: These are items which are debited to Profit and Loss account. These do not cause outflow of funds such as depreciation and depletion on non-current assets, amortization of fictitious and intangible assets, preliminary expenses, redemption of preference shares or debentures, deferred charges, advertising suspense account written off. If non fund expenditures do not affect the current assets such as unexpired insurance, do not add back. So also, all allowances for income tax payable in future years are excluded.

b. Non-trading charges or losses: These items which were debited to Profit and Loss account reduce the profits but they do not cause any outflow of funds. Hence, profit should be corrected by adding back all such charges and losses. These include appropriation of retained earnings such as general reserve, dividend equalization fund, and reserve for contingencies, sinking fund. In addition the dividend on shares must be added back since it is an appropriation and not trading charge. The losses arising out of sale of land, buildings, machinery, long term investments which were written off to the profit and loss account must be added back. Do not add the loss arising out of sale of a current asset such short term investments. It is a trading loss and hence it will not require any adjustment. The amount set aside as provision for current taxation will also be added back. This will be considered only when the provision for taxation is treated as a charge on profits.

Items that are to be deducted from Net Profit:

The non fund and non trading revenue receipts or incomes must be deducted from net profit in order to compute funds from operations. The items are:

(a) Dividend received or receivable: Although this transaction increases the current assets such as cash and debtors, it is not a trading income. Hence, it should be deducted from the net profits to determine the funds from operations.

(b) Retransfer of excess provisions: Where the provisions made for taxation, depreciation, doubtful debts exceed the genuine requirements, the excess amount is transferred back to the Profit and loss account. It does not create any inflow of funds since it is an accounting entry. Hence, deduct it.

(c) Profit on sale of non current assets: It is a non trading income. Hence it must be eliminated from the amount of profit.

Page 182: smu account assignment solved

(d) Appreciation in fixed assets: The amount of appreciation on revaluation of fixed assets is normally credited to the profit and loss account. If it is so, deduct it from the profit to compute the funds from operations.

Adjusted Profit and Loss a/c

To By

Depreciation written off Balance b/d (Opening bal )

Preliminary exp written off Profit on sale of investments

Goodwill written off Profit on sale of Fixed assets

Discount on issue of shares Dividend and interest received

Loss on sale of fixed assets Funds from Operations (bal fig)

Loss on sale of trade investments

Transfer to General Reserve

Provision for Tax

Provision for Proposed Dividend

Balance c/d (Net Profit) Closing balance

Total Total

NOTE:

· If debit total of Adjusted Profit and Loss a/c is more than the credit total, the difference is Funds generated from Operation

· If credit total of Adjusted Profit and Loss a/c is more than the debit total, the difference is funds lost in operations.

Page 183: smu account assignment solved

9.7 Funds Flow Statement

This forms the final step in funds flow analysis. It consist of two components – the source of funds and the application of funds. This statement reveals the overall creditworthiness of the enterprise. A Funds Flow Statement differs from an Income Statement in the following aspects:

1. Funds flow statement reveals how the funds were obtained and how they were utilized whereas the income statement discloses the results of the business activity.

2. A funds flow statement matches the ‘funds raised’ with ‘funds utilized’

3. Income statement which discloses the results of operations cannot accurately furnish funds from operations because non-fund items such as depreciation, writing off fictitious assets etc are included in it.

FORMAT OF FUNDS FLOW STATEMENT

SOURCES OF FUNDS Rs. Rs.

Funds from Operations

Non-trading incomes

Issue of Shares

Issue of Debentures

Borrowing of loans

Acceptance of deposits

Sale of fixed assets

Sale of Investments

Decrease in Working Capital

APPLICATION OF FUNDS

Funds lost in Operations

Non-operating expenses

Page 184: smu account assignment solved

Redemption of Preference shares

Redemption of debentures

Repayment of loans

Repayment of deposits

Purchase of fixed assets

Purchase of long term instruments

Increase in Working Capital

Illustration1: XYZ Ltd provides the following information

January 1 December 31

Sundry Debtors 65,000 1,05,000

Cash in hand 13,000 20,000

Cash at Bank 15,000 20,000

Bills Receivable 16,000 30,000

Inventory 90,000 84,000

Bills Payables 12,000 8,000

Outstanding expenses 6,000 5,000

Sundry Creditors 30,000 58,000

Bank Overdraft 30,000 42,000

Short term Loans 32,000 36,000

Prepare a schedule of changes in working capital

Page 185: smu account assignment solved

Solution

Schedule of changes in Working Capital

llustration 2: The following are the summarized Balance Sheets of Anderson Ltd.

BALANCE SHEET AS ON…….

Liabilities 2006 2007 Asset 2006 2007

Share Capital 5,00,000 6,00,000 Fixed Assets 10,00,000 11,20,000

Reserves 1,50,000 1,80,000 Less : Dep (3,70,000) (4,60,000)

P & L Account 40,000 65,000 Stock 2,40,000 3,70,000

Debentures 3,00,000 2,50,000 Book Debts 2,50,000 2,30,000

Creditors 1,70,000 1,60,000 Cash 1,00,000 75,000

Prov. for IT 60,000 80,000

12,20,000 13,35,000

12,20,000 13,35,000

Prepare a Funds Flow statement

Solution:

Page 186: smu account assignment solved

Notes:

1) The increase in General Reserve is due to transfer a part of profit of the current year and hence the difference is transferred to Adjusted Profit and Loss account since it’s a non-cash item

2) The difference in depreciation is charged to Adjusted P&L, since it’s a non-cash item.

3) Increase in Equity Share capital is assumed to be the fresh issue which is a cash item. It is recorded in Funds Flow Statement as source.

4) The difference is debenture is the redemption. It is taken to Funds Flow Statement as application of funds.

5) Purchase of fixed asset is difference between the opening and closing balance of fixed assets. It is application of funds and taken to Funds Flow Statement.

Illustration 3: Following is the Balance Sheet of M/s Srinivas Ltd. You are required to prepare a Fund Flow Statement

Particulars 2006 2007 Particulars 2006 2007

Equity Share capital

50,000 65,000 Cash balances 10,000 13,000

Page 187: smu account assignment solved

Profit & Loss 14,750 17,000 Debtors 25,000 27,000

Trade Creditors 29,000 31,000 Investment 5,000 nil

Mortgage 10,000 15,000 Fixed Assets 50,000 80,000

Short term loans 15,000 16,500 Less: Depreciation

(5,250) (7000)

Accrued expenses8,000 7,500 Goodwill 5,000 nil

Stock 37,000 39,000

Total 1, 26,750 1, 52,000Total 1, 26,7501, 52,000

Additional Information:

1. Depreciation provided is Rs.1750.

2. Write off goodwill.

3. Dividend paid Rs.3500.

Solution:

Page 188: smu account assignment solved

Illustration 4: Following is the balance sheet of M/s Mahaveer Enterprise for the year 1996 and 1997.

Additional Information: During the year ended 31st December,1998

1. Dividend of Rs.23,000 was paid

2. Assets of another company were purchased for a consideration of Rs.50,000 payable in shares. The assets include Stock Rs.20000, Machinery Rs.25,000

3. Machinery was further purchased for Rs.8000

4. Depreciation written off on machinery Rs.12,000

5. Income tax provided during the year Rs.33,000

6. Machinery worth Rs.2000 was sold for Rs.1800. Loss on sale of machinery Rs.200 was transferred to general reserve.

You are required to prepare Schedule of changes in Working Capital and Funds Flow Statement

Page 190: smu account assignment solved

* Issue of shares which involves current assets alone has to be taken here.

Illustration 5: From the following Balance Sheet of M/s. Rao Bros Ltd prepare Statement of Changes in Working Capital and Funds Flow Statement

Additional Information:

1. Preference Shares were redeemed at a premium of 5% during the year 1991.

2. Dividend at 15% on Equity Share for the year 1190 and Preference dividend for 1990 were paid.

3. The Provision for Depreciation stood at Rs.150000 and Rs.190000 for the year 1990 and 1991 respectively.

4. A machine costing Rs.70000, depreciation written off Rs.30000 was disposed off for Rs.25000.

Solution:

Page 192: smu account assignment solved

Self Assessment Questions:

12. The difference in General Reserve between two accounting period shown in the Balance Sheet is transferred to Adjusted Profit and Loss account since it is a _________

13. Any increase in Equity Share capital shown in the balance sheet is recorded as _________ in Funds Flow Statement

14. Purchase of Fixed Asset is considered as application of fund. How do you ascertain the amount if provision for depreciation is shown separately?

15. While preparing the schedule of changes in working capital:

a. Increase in current asset and decrease in current liability results in ______ in working capital

b. Decrease in current asset and increase in current liability results in _________ in working capital.

9.8 Summary

Funds flow indicates the inflows and outflows of funds during a particular accounting period generally a year. As such, the term ‘flow’ in the context of funds indicates the transfer of cash or cash equivalent from asset to equity or one equity to equity or from one asset to another asset.

Page 193: smu account assignment solved

Statement of Sources and Uses of Funds or Funds Flow Statement is a statement which depicts the sources from which funds are obtained and how they have been utilized. When a transaction results in increase of funds it is termed as “source of fund” and when it results in decrease of fund it is termed as “application of fund”. Funds flow statement reveals how the funds were obtained and how they were utilized whereas the income statement discloses the results of the business activity.

9.9 Terminal Question

1. What type of transactions affect flow of funds in funds flow statement?

2. What types of transactions are unaffected in the funds flow?

3. Distinguish between funds flow and income statement

4. Briefly explain the steps involved in preparation of funds flow statement

5. Prepare a statement of changes in working capital from the following information.

Prepare Statement of Changes in Working Capital

9.10 Answer Self Assessment Questions

1. Change in Working Capital

2. Gross

3. Fictitious Assets

4. Application of Funds

5. False

12. Non cash items

13. Source

14. If provision for depreciation is shown separately the difference between closing fixed asset (gross) and opening fixed asset (gross) is taken as additional purchase made during the year.

Page 194: smu account assignment solved

6. True

7. No

8. False

9. This transaction will not have any effect on flow of funds because it involves only current liability.

10. Creditors paid off by issue of debentures

11. Building transferred to creditors in satisfaction of their claims.

15. (a) increase

(b) decrease

Answer for Terminal Questions

1. Refer Unit 9.3

2. Refer Unit 9.3

3. Refer Unit 9.7

4. Refer Unit 9.4

5. Statement of changes in working capital during the year

6.

Note: If the investments are in the form of Government Securities, it is treated as current assets.

Page 195: smu account assignment solved

Copyright © 2009 SMU

Powered by Sikkim Manipal University

.

MB0041-Unit-10-Cash Flow Analysis

Unit-10-Cash Flow Analysis

Structure:

10.1 Introduction

Objective

10.2 Meaning of Cash Flow Statement

10.3 Purpose of Cash Flow Statement

10.4 Preparation of Cash Flow Statement

Page 196: smu account assignment solved

10.5 Format of Cash Flow Statement (AS3: Revised Method)

10.6 Cash Flow from Operating Activities

10.7 Cash Flow Statement under Direct Method

10.8 Different between Cash Flow Analysis and Fund Flow Analysis

10.9 Uses of Cash Flow Statement

10.10 Summary

10.11 Terminal Questions

10.12 Answers to SAQ’s and TQ’s

10.1 Introduction

The funds flow analysis deal with the flow of funds within and outside the organization. However the main focus of funds flow statement is to explain the changes which have taken place in net working capital during the period under consideration. It fails to explain the changes in cash balance. The movement of cash is of vital importance to the management. The organization may become directionless if the cash inflows are not sufficient to meet the cash outflows. Many a time, a management is posed with the paradox of huge profits and yet impossible to pay dividends or even taxes. This is due to the ground realities that cash is either not received or the cash received is drained out in other items. Hence, it has become a necessity to have a cash flow analysis on periodic intervals say every quarter. The statement shows the items resulting in cash inflows and cash outflows.

Objectives:

After studying this unit, you should be able to:

1. Explain the meaning of cash flow statement.

2. Describe the broad classification of cash flow statement

3. Recall the revised AS 3 format of cash flow statement

4. Acquaint with steps in preparation of CFS.

5. Compute the Cash Flow Statement

6. Distinguish between Cash Flow Statement and Funds Flow Statement

10.2 Meaning of Cash Flow Statement

Page 197: smu account assignment solved

Cash flow statement, also known as “Statement Accounting for variations in cash”, ‘Where Got Where Gone Statement’. It shows the movement of cash and their causes during the period under consideration. The statement is significant to the stakeholders of the company and is prepared to show the impact of financial policies and procedures on the cash position. It takes into account all the transactions that have a direct impact upon cash and cash equivalent.

10.3 Purpose of Cash Flow Statement

According to Accounting Standard 3, it is mandatory to prepare and present Cash flow statement along with Statement of financial Position and Statement of Income position at the end of accounting period. Unlike Fund Flow statement, cash flow statement explains in depth the inflow and outflow of cash and cash equivalent in three categories viz Net cash flow from operating activities, Net cash flow investment activities and Net cash flow from financing activities. It answers some of the important questions on the company such as:

· How much cash has been spent on investment activities such as purchase of new plant and machinery, purchase of land?

· Have long-term source of cash both internally generated plus raised externally adequate to finance purchase of new long term fixed assets?

· What is the liquidity position of the company? Has it improved?

· How the company is handling large dividend payment? Is it managing with its reserves or is it borrowing?

10.4 Preparation of Cash Flow Statement

According to Accounting Standard 3 (Revised) method cash flow statement is sub divided into three parts – (i) cash flow from operating activities (ii) cash flow from investing activities (iii) cash flow from financing activities.

1. Cash flow from Operating Activities:

Operating activities are the principal revenue producing activities of the enterprise. Therefore, they generally result from the transactions and other events that enter into the determination of net profit or loss.

The amount of cash flows arising from operating activities is a key indicator of the extent to which the operations of the enterprise have generated sufficient cash flows to maintain the operating capability of the enterprise, pay dividends, repay loans and make new investments without recourse to external source of financing. Information about the specific components of future operating cash flows is useful in conjunction with other information in forecasting future operating cash flows.

Computation of Operating Profit before Working capital changes:

Page 198: smu account assignment solved

The Net Profit shown in the Profit and Loss Account will have to be adjusted for non-cash items for find out operating profit before working capital changes. Some if these items are as follows:

i. Depreciation: Depreciation does not result in outflow of cash and, therefore, net profit will have to be increased by the amount of depreciation or development rebate charged, in order to find out the real cash generated from operations.

ii. Amortization of intangible assets: Goodwill, preliminary expenses, etc., when written off should therefore, be added back to profits to find out the cash from operations.

iii. Loss on Sale of fixed assets: It does not result in outflow of cash and, therefore, should be added back of profits.

iv. Gains from sale of fixed assets: Since a sale of fixed assets is taken as a separate source of cash, it should be deducted from net profits.

v. Creation of reserves: If profit for the year has been arrived at after charging transfers to reserves, such transfers should be added back to profits. If cash operations show a net loss, such net loss after making adjustments for non-cash items will be shown as an application of cash.

Thus cash from operations is computed on the pattern of computation of ‘Funds’ from operations.

Cash generated from Operations

To find the cash from operations, adjustments will have to be made for ‘changes’ in current assets and current liabilities arising on account of operations.

· Any decrease in current assets or any increase in current liabilities between two periods should be added back to Operating profit before working capital changes.

· Likewise any increase in current assets or any decrease in current liabilities should be deducted from Operating profit before working capital changes to arrive at cash generated from Operations.

Page 199: smu account assignment solved

Computation of Net Cash Flow from Operating Activities:

From cash generated from operations Income tax paid, cash flow from extraordinary items (if any) should be adjusted (subtracted) to arrive at Net cash flow from operating activities.

2. Cash Flow from Investing Activities

Transactions like purchase or sale of fixed assets, proceeds from sale of equipments, Interest on Investment received, Dividends received are recorded.

3. Cash Flow from Financing Activities

Transactions such as proceeds from issue of shares, debentures, proceeds from long term loans, repayment of long term loans, Interest paid on debentures, dividend payment to equity, preference share holders are shown to arrive at net cash used in financing activities.

Purchase of plant and machinery on lease or hire purchase should be shown separately as deferred credit. However the cost of machinery purchased will be shown as application of cash.

Computation of Net Increase in Cash and Cash Equivalent

The net cash flow from operating, investing and financing activities are added to arrive at net increase in cash and cash equivalent. To this cash and cash equivalent at the beginning of the period is added to get cash and cash equivalent at the end of the period.

Self Assessment Questions 1:

7. Preparation and submission of Cash Flow Statement is mandatory according to ______________

8. Cash Flow Statement has three sub division- _____________ ,________________________ and ______________________.

9. Since depreciation, a component of internal source does not result in outflow of cash; the depreciation amount is ______ to the Net Profit.

10. Give any three internal sources of cash that does not result in outflow of cash.

11. Decrease in liability denotes ____________ of cash

12. Purchase of Plant and Machinery on deferred payment basis is shown separately as source of cash or ________________

10.5 Format of CASH FLOW STATEMENT [AS 3: (Revised) Method]

Page 200: smu account assignment solved

CASH FLOW STATEMENT (Indirect Method) for the year ending on……

1. Cash flow from Operating Activities

Net Profit before taxation and extraordinary items:

Adjustments for

· Depreciation

· Foreign Exchange loss

· Interest Income

· Dividend Income

· Interest expenses

Operating Profit before Working Capital changes

(+)Decrease/(-)Increase in Sundry Debtors

(+)Decrease/(-)Increase in Inventories

(-)Decrease /(+) Increase in Sundry Creditors

Cash generated from operations

Income Tax Paid

Cash flow from extraordinary items

Proceeds from earthquake disaster settlement

Net Cash flow from Operating activities (i)

Cash Flow from Investing Activities

Purchase of Fixed Assets

Page 201: smu account assignment solved

Proceeds from sale of equipment

Interest received

Dividends received

Net cash flow from investing activities (ii)

Cash flow from Financing Activities

Proceeds from issuance of share capital

Proceeds from long term borrowings

Repayment of long term loans

Interest Paid

Dividends Paid

Net cash used in financing activities (iii)

Net increase in cash & cash equivalent (i)+(ii)+(iii)

(+) Cash and cash equivalents at the beginning of the period

= Cash and cash equivalents at the end of the period

The closing balance of Cash and cash equivalent should tally with cash and bank balance of Balance Sheet.

Self Assessment Questions:

7. Income Tax paid is ___________activity (operating/investing/financing).

8. Purchase of fixed assets is cash flow from ________ activity ( financing / investing).

Page 202: smu account assignment solved

9. Repayment of long term loans, dividend paid are _____________ activity (financing / investing).

10. Net Increase in cash and cash equivalent + _______________________ = Cash and cash equivalent at the end of the period

11. Decrease in Sundry Debtors should be _________ to Operating profit before working capital changes

12. Increase in Sundry Creditors should be _________ to Operating profit before working capital changes.

Illustration 1: Compute the cash flow from operating activities

Profit and Loss Account

To

By

Cost of goods sold 4,00,000 Sales including cash sales 1,00,000

5,00,000

Office expenses 12,000 Profit on sale of land 30,000

Selling expenses 8,000 Interest on investment20,000

Depreciation 6,000

Loss on sale of plant 4,000

Goodwill written off 3,000

Income tax 7,000

Net Profit 1,10,000

5,50,000

5,50,000

Page 203: smu account assignment solved

Solution

Illustration 2: Calculate cash flow from operating activities if the operating profit before working capital changes Rs.3,80,000

Solution

Illustration 3: The following is the Balance sheet for the period ending 31st March 2006 and 2007. If the Current year net loss is Rs.38,000. Calculate the cash flows

Page 204: smu account assignment solved

Solution

Illustration 4:

Following is the extracts of Balance Sheet in respect of a company.

The current year net loss is Rs. 50,000. Calculate the cash flows.

Solution:

Page 205: smu account assignment solved

Illustration 5: Following is the balance sheet of Amit and bros for the year 2006 and 2007. You are required to prepare Cash Flow Statement

BALANCE SHEET as on March 31st 2006 and 2007

Liabilities 2006 2007

Share Capital 2,00,000 2,50,000

General Reserve 50,000 60,000

Profit and Loss 30,500 30,600

Bank Loan (Long-term) 70,000 -

Sundry Creditors 1,50,000 1,35,200

Provision for Taxation 30,000 35,000

Total 5,30,500 5,10,800

Assets

Land and Building 2,00,000 1,90,000

Machinery 1,50,000 1,69,000

Stock 1,00,000 74,000

Page 206: smu account assignment solved

Sundry Debtors 80,000 64,200

Cash 500 600

Bank - 8,000

Goodwill - 5,000

Total 5,30,500 5,10,800

Additional Information:

During the year ended 31st December,2007

1. Dividend of Rs.23,000 was paid

2. Assets of another company were purchased for a consideration of Rs.50,000 payable in shares. The assets include Stock Rs.20000, Machinery Rs.25,000

3. Machinery was further purchased for Rs.8000

4. Depreciation written off on machinery Rs.12,000

5. Income tax provided during the year Rs.33,000

6. Machinery worth Rs.2000 was sold for Rs.1800. Loss on sale of machinery Rs.200 was transferred to general reserve.

Page 207: smu account assignment solved

Ledger accounts of certain transactions are prepared to find the hidden information. By the virtue of practice certain information can be traced even without preparation of ledger accounts [eg. Bank loan a/c, land and building a/c]

Page 208: smu account assignment solved

Illustration 6

Following are the summarized balance sheets of Thomson as on 31st December 2005 and 2006.

Adjustments

1. Dividend of Rs. 11,500 was paid

2. Assets of another Company were purchased for a consideration of Rs. 30,000 payable in shares. The following assets were purchased (a) stock Rs. 10,000 (b) Machinery Rs.12,500

3. Machinery was further purchased for Rs. 4,000

4. Income tax paid Rs. 16,500 for the tear

5. Depreciation written-off in Machinery Rs. 6,000

6. Loss on sale machine Rs. 100 was written-off to General Reserve. Prepare Cash flow statement.

Solution:

Page 210: smu account assignment solved

13. Dividend received is ____________ activity because income is received from investment in shares of another company.

14. Dividend paid is _____________ activity.

10.7 Cash Flow Statement under Direct Method

Under this method gross cash receipts and gross cash payments for the major items are disclosed, such as cash receipts from customers and cash paid to suppliers.

Illustration 6: Given below are the Balance Sheet as on March 31, previous year and current year, and a Statement of Income and Reconciliation of earnings for the current year of Electronics Ltd. The only item in the plant and machinery account sold during the year was a specialized machine that originally cost Rs.15 lacs. The accumulated depreciation on this machine at the time of sale was Rs.8 lacs. The machine was sold for Rs.6 lacs and full payment was received in cash. Electronics Ltd. purchased patents for Rs.16 lacs during the year. Besides cash purchases of plant and equipment, the assets of another company were also purchased for Rs.1 crore payable in fully paid-up shares, issued at par; the assets purchased being goodwill, Rs.30 lacs and plant, Rs.70 lacs.

Page 211: smu account assignment solved

From the foregoing information, prepare a Cash-flow statement both under Direct and Indirect Method for Electronics Ltd.

Solution [A]: [Direct method]

N.B: * It may be recalled that cash from operating activities [shown in Section II] was Rs.14; the difference of Rs.14 [Rs.28 as per AS – 3 and Rs.14 as per CFS] is due to exclusion of interest payment on debentures [Rs.14]; this interest payment is shown under financing activities.

Page 212: smu account assignment solved

Working Notes: 1

Solution [B]: [Indirect method]

The Statement highlights that the firm does not have enough funds from its operating activities [Rs.28 lacs] and financing activities [Rs.20 lacs] to cater to investment requirement of Rs.85 lacs, causing decline in cash [Rs.37 lacs]

Problem on Cash Flow And Funds Flow Statement:

Illustration 7: The financial position of M/s C and D on Jan 1 and December 31st, 2004 was as follows:

Page 213: smu account assignment solved

Liabilities 1st Jan 31st Dec Asset 1st Jan 31st Dec

Current liability for goods (crs)

36,000 40,600 Cash 4000 3,600

Mrs.A’s Loan - 20,000 Debtors 35,000 38,000

Loan from Bank

30,000 25,000 Stock 25,000 22,000

Hire Purchase vendor

- 20,000 Land 20,000 30,000

Capital 1,48,000 1,54,000 Building 50,000 55,000

Machinery 80,000 86,000

Delivery Van

- 25,000

Total 2,14,000 2,59,600 Total 2,14,000 2,59,600

The delivery van was purchased in December 2004 on hire purchase basis; a payment of Rs.5000 was made immediately and the balance of the amount is to be paid in 20 monthly installments of Rs.1000 each together with interest at 12% p.a. During the year the partners withdrew Rs.26,000 for domestic expenditure. The provision for depreciation against machinery on 31st December 2003 was Rs.27,000 and on 31st December 2004 Rs.36,000 You are required to prepare the Funds flow and Cash Flow statement. Observe the difference between funds from operations and cash from operations and give the inference.

1. Preparation of funds flow statement

Page 215: smu account assignment solved

10.8 Difference between Cash Flow Analysis and Funds Flow Analysis

Following are the points of difference between Cash Flow Analysis and a Funds Flow:

Cash Flow Analysis Fund Flow Analysis

1. It is concerned only with the change in cash position

1. Is concerned with change in working capital position between; two balance sheet dates.

2. It merely a record of cash receipts and disbursements

2. In Fund Flow statement net effect of receipts and disbursements are recorded.

3. It is more useful to the management as a tool of financial analysis in short period.

3. It is concerned with the total provision of funds.

4. Cash is part of working capital and therefore, an improvement in cash position results in improvement in the funds position

4. An improvement in funds positions need not resulting improvement in cash position

5. An increase in a current liability of decrease in a current asset will result in increase in cash position

5. An increase in a current liability or decrease in a current asset results decrease in working capital

6. It is based on cash basis 6. It is based on accrual basis

7. It is not based on ledger mode7. It is based on ledger principles

10.9 Uses of Cash Flow Statement

The cash flow statement, being one of the important financial documents a firm has to possess, reveals the effective uses. First of all, it explains in depth the reasons for the low cash balance available at a particular time. Based on this, it is possible to find the reasons for such a situation. It also shows the major sources and uses of cash. By effectively maintaining the cash and controlling the outflow of cash, it is possible to set in motion the smooth functioning of the organization. It helps the financial decisions more effectively with regard to short term liquidity position of an organization. Projections of cash inflows and outflows can be regulated based on

Page 216: smu account assignment solved

the records available in the past. Proper projections can be made once the reasons are analyzed. Based on this, it is possible to liquidate the short term obligations without much fun-fare. Short term obligations need to be serviced so that the credit worthiness of an organization can be carried on unabated.

10.10 Summary

Cash flow statement, also known as “Statement Accounting for variations in cash”, ‘Where Got Where Gone Statement’. It shows the movement of cash and their causes during the period under consideration. According to Accounting Standard 3, it is mandatory to prepare and present Cash flow statement along with Statement of financial Position and Statement of Income position at the end of accounting period.

Operating activities are the principal revenue producing activities of the enterprise. Therefore, they generally result from the transactions and other events that enter into the determination of net profit or loss.

10.11 Terminal Questions

1. What is cash flow statement and how is the cash flow statement subdivided?

2. Bring out the draft format of cash flow statement as per AS3 (revised) method?

3. What is cash flow from operating activities?

4. Bring out the difference between cash flow analysis and funds flow analysis

5. From the following balance sheets of Joy Ltd. Prepare cash flow statement under indirect method.

Additional Information

Page 217: smu account assignment solved

a) Depreciation of Rs. 10,000 and Rs. 20,000 have been changed on plant and building during the current year.

b) An interim dividend of Rs. 20,000 has been paid during the current year.

c) Rs. 35,000 was paid during the current year for income tax.

10.12 Answer Self Assessment Questions

SAQ 1:

1. AS3

2. a. Net cash flow from operating activities

b. Net cash flow from investment activities

c. Net cash flow from financing activities

3. Added back

4. Depreciation, Amortization of intangible assets, Gains from sale of fixed assets

5. Outflow

6. Deferred credit

7. Operating

8. Investing

9. Financing

10. Cash and cash equivalent at the beginning of the year

11. Added

12. Added

Answer for Terminal Questions

1. Refer to unit 10.4

2. Refer to unit 10.5

3. Refer to unit 10.6

4. Refer to unit 10.8

5. Cash flow from operating activities Rs.1,25,000; Cash flow from investing activities (Rs.1,20,000); Cash flow from financing activities (Rs.12,000).

Page 218: smu account assignment solved

13. Investment

14. Financing

Activity 1: Solution

Copyright © 2009 SMU

Powered by Sikkim Manipal University

.

MB0041-Unit-11-Understanding Cost

Unit-11-Understanding Cost

Structure:

11.1 Introduction

Objectives

11.2 Meaning of Cost

11.3 Objective of Costing

11.4 Methods of Costing

Page 219: smu account assignment solved

11.5 Technique of Costing

11.6 Classification of Cost

11.7 Elements of Cost

11.8 Statement of Cost Sheet

11.9 Solved Problems

11.10 Summary

11.11 Terminal Questions

11.12 Answers to SAQ’s and TQ’s

11.1 Introduction

Management accounting is the application of accounting techniques for providing information necessary for decision making. It is designed to help all levels of management in planning and controlling the activities of a business enterprise. The objective of management accounting is to determine product cost, to facilitate planning and control of regular business activities and to supply information for short and long run decisions.

Costing is the process of determining the cost of doing something, eg. cost of manufacturing an article, rendering a service or performing a function. Costing includes the techniques and processes of ascertaining cost. In this unit we are dealing with different methods of costing, different techniques of costing and finally classification of costs under various heads.

Objectives:

After studying this unit, you should be able to:

1. Explain the meaning of cost.

2. Differentiate between cost, expenses and loss

3. Explain the objective and methods of costing

4. Know the techniques of costing

5. Know the various classification of cost

6. Understand the element of cost.

7. Draft the specimen of cost sheet

Page 220: smu account assignment solved

8. Prepare the statement of cost.

11.2 Meaning of Cost

Cost is the amount of resources given up in exchange of some goods and services. The resources are expressed in money or money’s equivalent. CIMA defines the term cost as “the amount of expenditure (actual or notional) incurred on or attributable to a given thing”. The given thing may be taken as a product, service or any other activity. While the actual expenditure refers to the amount spent, the notional expenditure does not involve in any cash outlay. It does not reflect itself in the accounting records. But, it is important for the purpose of comparison of cost and in decision making.

Cost Vs Expenses and Loss

An expense is defined as an expired cost resulting from a productive usage of an asset. Unconsumed or unexpired part of the cost is recorded as an asset in the balance sheet.

Loss is defined as reduction in firm’s equity other than from withdrawals of capital for which no compensating value has been received.

11.3 Objective of Costing

It aims to serve the information needs of management for planning, control and decision making.

· It helps to determine product cost. They are important in inventory valuation, decision regarding pricing of the product.

· It facilitates planning and control of regular business activities. Different alternative plans are evaluated in terms of respective cost and associated benefits. In control process the data generated can be compared with budgets and estimates.

· It supplies information for short term and long term decisions. These decisions involve whether to develop new products, when to enter which market etc.

11.4 Methods of Costing

Costing refers to the techniques and processes of determining costs of a product manufactured or a service rendered. The method of costing depends on the nature of product, production method and specific business conditions. For example, in cement or steel industry, raw materials passes through different stages (processes) and production is done on continuous bases while in case of construction of a house or contract to build a metro rail / flyover / underpass the job is for a

Page 221: smu account assignment solved

specific purpose and each job is different from the other. In service industry like hospitality industry, software development, back office processing work etc process costing technique is used.

A. Job Costing: It is used in those business concerns where production is carried out as per specific order and customer’s specification.

B. Process Costing: This method is used in those industries where manufacture is done continuously thereby it is difficult to trace costs to specific units. The total cost is averaged for the number of units manufactured.

Unit Costing This method is used when a single item is produced and the final product is composed of homogeneous units. The cost per unit is obtained by dividing the total cost by the total number of units manufactured.

Eg. Sugar industry, Cement, Fertilizer, Chemicals, Petroleum refining, LPG, Paper etc.

Operating Costing

This method is used by service industries. The unit cost differs among these services depending upon the nature of service being rendered.

Eg. Passenger mile, bed in a hospital, per student in a college.

Operation Costing

This product costing is used when conversion activities are very similar across

Eg. The professional basket balls are covered with genuine leather whereas the

Page 222: smu account assignment solved

products lines but the direct materials differ significantly.

scholastic basketballs are covered with imitation leather.

Cost Centre: Cost centre refers to a section of the business to which costs can be charged. It may be location (a department, sales area), an item of equipment (a machine, a delivery van), a person (a salesman, a machine operator or a group of these).

Cost Unit: It is a unit of quantity of product, service or time (or a combination of these), in relation to which cost may be ascertained or expressed.

Self Assessment Questions:

1. Unexpired costs is termed as ___________

2. Different types of job costing are ____________,___________ and __________

3. Different types of process costing are _________.________ and ____________

11.5 Techniques of Costing

Techniques refer to principles and rules that are applied for ascertaining cost of the product manufactured or an activity rendered. The following are the costing techniques generally used:

1. Historical Costing: In this system costs are determined after they have been incurred.

2. Standard Costing: In this system, standard costs are ascertained and then compared with the actual cost and the variance if any is determined. Standard costs are predetermined costs in conformity with the most efficient operations or industry benchmark.

3. Absorption or Full Costing: In this method, all costs both fixed and variable are charged to the products, jobs or processes.

4. Variable or Marginal Costing: In this method, only variable costs are charged to the product or jobs. The fixed costs are written off against profits in the period in which they arise.

5. Uniform costing: It is an attempt by several undertakings to use similar costing principles or practices.

11.6 Classification of cost

Page 223: smu account assignment solved

The elements of costs are classified as materials, labor and expenses. These three elements of cost would be grouped in to direct and indirect categories. Following are the three broad elements of cost

· Materials – Direct (chargeable) and Indirect

· Labor – Direct and Indirect

· Expenses

1. Direct Material: It refers to the cost of materials which are conveniently and economically traceable to specific units of output. Eg. raw cotton in textiles, crude oil to make diesel, steel to make automobiles, components or parts, primary packing materials, import duties, dock charges, transport of raw materials.

2. Direct Labour: It is defined as the labour of those workers who are engaged in the production process. It is the labour expended directly upon the materials comprising the finished goods.

3. Direct Expenses: These include any expenditure other than direct material and direct labour directly incurred on a specific product or job. Eg. cost of hiring special machinery or plant, cost of special moulds, designs and patterns, experimental cost on models and pilot schemes, fee paid to architects, surveyors, inward carriage and freight on special materials, cost of patent and

4. Factory Overhead: It is defined as the cost of indirect materials, indirect labour and indirect expenses.

Indirect materials: It refers to materials that are needed for the completion of the product but whose consumption with regard to the product is either so small or so complex that it would not be appropriate to treat it as a direct material item. These materials cannot be conveniently assigned to specific physical units. Eg. Lubricants, cotton waste, hand tools, works stationery.

· Indirect Labour: Indirect labour includes foremen, shop clerks, general helpers, cleaners, material handlers, plant guards, maintenance men.

· Indirect expenses: It covers all indirect expenditure incurred from the time production has started to its completion and its transfer to the finished goods store. eg. heat, light, maintenance, factory manager’s salary.

5. Selling, Distribution and Administration Overhead: Such expenses are generally incurred when the product is in saleable condition. It includes advertising, salesmen salaries, commission, packing, storage, transportation and sales administrative costs.

6. Fixed Cost: It is a cost which does not change in total for a given time period despite wide fluctuation in output or volume of activity. These costs are also known as standby costs, capacity costs or period costs. Eg. Rent, property taxes, supervising salaries, depreciation of office facilities, advertising and insurance.

Page 224: smu account assignment solved

Example: The production volume and Fixed costs

Total Fixed Cost Production (in units) Average Fixed Cost per unit

10,00,000 1000 Rs.1000

10,00,000 2,000 Rs.500

10,00,000 5,000 Rs.200

10,00,000 10,000 Rs.100

Fixed costs will not change over a wide range of volume. They will fluctuate before and beyond that range.

Classification of Fixed Cost:

· Committed cost: Such costs are primarily incurred to maintain the company’s facilities and physical existence and over which management has little or no discretion. Depreciation on P&M, taxes, insurance rent etc are the examples.

Page 225: smu account assignment solved

· Managed cost: They relate to the current operations which must continue to be paid to ensure the continued operating existence of the company. eg Staff and management salaries.

· Discretionary cost: They are also known as programmed cost which is incurred due to special policy decision, mgt program, new research or new system development.

· Step Cost: This cost is constant for a given amount of output and then increases in a fixed amount at a higher output level. One supervisor is required at a salary of Rs.10000 pm for every 50 workers. The cost of supervisor salary increases to Rs.20000 on employing 51st worker.

7. Variable Cost:

Variable costs are costs that vary directly and proportionately with the output. There is a constant ratio between the change in the cost and the change in the level of output. Eg. Direct material and Direct labour and Variable overheads (factory supplies, indirect materials, sales commission, office supplies)If the factory is shut down, variable costs are eliminated.

8. Mixed Cost: are costs made up of fixed and variable element. They are a combination of semi-variable cost and semi-fixed costs. Because of the variable component they fluctuate with volume; because of the fixed component they do not change in direct proportion to output.

Semi-fixed cost is those costs which remain constant up to a certain level of output after which they become variable.

Semi-variable cost is the cost which is basically variable but whose slope may change abruptly when a certain output level is reached.

9. Product Cost: Are those costs which are identified with the product and included in inventory values. In other words the costs that is included in the cost of manufacturing a product. It is composed of four elements- direct materials, direct labour, direct expenses and manufacturing overhead.

10. Period Cost: are the costs which are not identified with the product or job and are deducted as expenses during the period in which they are incurred. They are not carried forward as a part of value of inventory to the next accounting period.

Page 226: smu account assignment solved

11. Opportunity cost: it is cost of opportunity lost. It is the cost of selecting one course of action in terms of the opportunities which are given up to carry out that course of action. It is the benefit lost by rejecting the best competing alternative to the one chosen.

12. Sunk Cost: It is the cost that has already been incurred. It is generally unavoidable because these costs cannot be changed once incurred. If the plant has a book value of 10 lakhs and a scrap value of 50000, then the sunk cost is 9.5lakhs.

13. Relevant Cost: are those future costs which differ between alternatives. It may also be defined as the cost which are affected and changed by a decision. They are not historic (sunk) cost and are only incremental (additional) or avoidable cost.

14. Differential cost: It is the difference in total costs between any two alternatives. It is equal to the additional variable expenses incurred in respect of the additional output, plus the increase in the fixed costs if any.

15. Imputed cost: are costs not actually incurred in some transaction but which are relevant to the decision as they pertain to a particular situation. Eg. Interest on internally generated funds, rental value of company owned property and salaries of owners.

16. Out-of-Pocket cost: While imputed costs do not involve cash outlays, out-of-pocket costs signify the cash cost incurred on an activity. This cost concept is significant for management in deciding whether or not a particular project will at least return the cash expenditure associated with the project.

17. Shut Down cost: are those costs which have to be incurred under all situations in the case of stopping manufacture of a product or closing down a department or a division. They are fixed cost. It also refers to minimum fixed cost which is incurred in the event of closure.

Self Assessment Questions:

4. Standard costs are predetermined costs which are compared with actual costs and the variance is determined. (state true or false)

5. _______ include costs both fixed and variable are charged to the products, jobs or process

6. Cost of hiring special machines, cost of special moulds are examples of _______

7. _______ are costs are unavoidable because these costs cannot be changed once incurred.

11.7 Elements of Cost

Every product that is manufactured whether it is a pin or a computer needs resources. The management must know the cost of using their resources for its planning and control function. Therefore, the elements of costs are classified as materials, labor and expenses. These three elements of cost would be grouped in to direct and indirect categories

Page 227: smu account assignment solved

Prime Cost: It is the total of direct materials cost, direct labor cost and chargeable expenses.

Factory Cost: It consists of prime cost and factory overheads.

Office cost or Cost of Production: It comprises of factory cost and office and administration overheads.

Total Cost: By adding selling and distribution expenses to cost of production, one can get the total cost or cost of sales.

11.8 Statement of Cost Sheet

Cost sheet is a statement prepared to show the different components of the total cost. It generally shows the total cost and sales as well as cost and selling price per unit. It is generally presented in a tabular form.

Specimen of Cost Sheet

Cost Sheet for the period __________

Production _____ units

Total Cost Cost per

unit

Opening Stock of Raw Materials

Purchases

Carriage Inward

(-) Closing Stock of Raw Materials

(-) Scrap

Direct materials Consumed (I)

Direct Wages (II)

Direct Expenses (III)

I PRIME COST = (I)+ (II)+(III)

Page 228: smu account assignment solved

(+) Factory Overheads

Indirect Materials

Loose Tools

Indirect Wages

Rent and Rates (factory)

Lighting & Heating (factory)

Power & Fuel

Lubricant

Repairs and Maintenance

Drawing Office Expenses

Cost of research

Depreciation of factory plant

Works Stationery

Welfare service expenses

Insurance – Fixed assets

Insurance – Stock and finished goods

Work’s Managers salary

II FACTORY OR WORKS COST

(+) Opening stock of Work-in-progress

(-) Closing stock of Work-in-progress

Page 229: smu account assignment solved

III COST OF GOODS MANUFACTURED

(+) Office and Administrative overhead

Rent and Rates (office)

Salaries (office)

Lighting and Heating

Insurance of office building

Telephone and Postage

Printing and Stationery

Depreciation on furniture and fixtures

Legal Expenses

Audit fee

Bank Charges

IV COST OF PRODUCTION

(+) Opening Stock of Finished Goods

(-) Closing Stock of Finished Goods

V COST OF GOOD SOLD

(+) Selling and Distribution Overhead

Show room rent and rates

Salesman’s salary

Commission

Page 230: smu account assignment solved

Travelling expenses of salesman

Advertisement

Bad debts

Carriage outward

Samples and other free gifts

VI COST OF SALES

VII NET PROFIT (LOSS)

VIII SALES

Items not included in Cost Sheet:

a) Income tax i) Commission to managing directors

b)    Dividends to shareholders j)     Underwriting commission

c)    Premium on redemption of shares and debentures

k)  Writing of goodwill, preliminary expenses

d)    Capital losses i.e. loss out of sales l) Reserve for bad debts

e)    Interest on loan or debentures or bank interest

m) Transfer to all reserves or appropriation of profits

f)     Donations n) Share premium

g)    Capital expenditure o) Interest on capital

h)    Discounts on shares and debentures

p) Drawing of proprietors

q) All personal expenses of owner

11.9 Solved Problems

Page 231: smu account assignment solved

Illustration 1:

Prepare a cost sheet:

Direct materials Rs.2,00,000; Factory expenses Rs.1,20,000; Office expenses Rs.90,000; Total sales Rs.6,50,000; Prime cost Rs.4,10,000; 10 % of the output is in stock.

Solution

Cost Sheet

Direct materials 2,00,000

Direct wages (Prime cost minus Direct materials 2,10,000

Prime Cost 4,10,000

Factory expenses 1,20,000

Factory Cost 5,30,000

Office expenses 90,000

Cost of Production 6,20,000

Less: closing stock of finished goods 10 % of 6.20,000 -62,000

Cost of Sales 5,58,000

Profit (balancing figure) 92,000

SALES 6,50,000

Illustration 2:

The following information is obtained from Alice Ltd. Prepare Cost sheet.

Stock on Jan 1, 2007 : Work in progress : 1.1.2007

64,000.

Raw materials 40,000 31:.12.:2007 72,000

Page 232: smu account assignment solved

Finished goods 30, 000 Goodwill written off 40,000.

Purchases of Raw materials

2,40,000 Stock on 31.12.2007

Direct wages 1,36,000. Raw materials 42,000 42,000

Works expenses 70,400 Finished goods 32,000

Dividends paid 40,000 Sale of finished goods 5,50,000

Office expenses 24,000. Payment of sales tax 16,000

Depreciation 10,000

Selling and Distribution expenses

32,000

Solution

Activity 1

Prepare a cost sheet in the format given below. The following are the details:

Raw materials consumed Rs.1,60,000. Direct wages Rs.80,000. Factory overheads Rs.16,000. Office overheads 10% of factory cost. Selling overheads Rs.12,000. Units produced 4,000.Selling price per unit Rs.100.The closing stock is 10% of units produced.

Page 233: smu account assignment solved

Solution:

Illustration 3:

Calculate prime cost, factory cost, cost of production and cost of sales from the following particulars:

Rs Rs

Rs Rs

Direct materials

40,000 Consumable stores

1,000

Direct wages

10,000 Manager’s salary

2,000

Direct expense

2,000 Director’s fees

500

Oil and waste

100 Office printing & stationery

200

Wages of foremen

1,000 Telephone charges

50

Storekeeper’s wages

500 Postage, telegrams

100

Electric power

200 Salesmen’s commission & salary

500

Lighting – Factory 500

Travelling expenses

200

Office 200 700 Advertising

500

Rent – Factory 2,000

Warehouse charges

200

Page 234: smu account assignment solved

Office 1,000 3,000 Carriage outward

150

Repairs and Renewals:

Factory -plant 500

- machinery 1,000

- Office premises 200 1,700

Depreciation

– Office Premises500

– Plant and machinery 200 700

Solution: Cost Sheet for the period ………

Total Cost / unit

Direct Materials 40,000

Direct Wages 10.000

Direct expenses 2.000

I Prime Cost 52,000

(+) Factory overhead

Oil and waste 100

Wage for foremen 1,000

Storekeeper’s wages 500

Electric power 200

Lighting – Factory 500

Rent – Factory 2,000

Page 235: smu account assignment solved

Repairs and Renewals:

Factory plant 500

Machinery 1,000

Depreciation plant and machinery 200

Consumable stores 1,000 7,000

II Factory or Works Cost 59,000

(+) Office overhead

Lighting – Office 200

Rent – Office 1,000

Repairs office premises 200

Depreciation office premises 500

Director fees 500

Office printing and stationery 200

Telephone charges 50

Postage and telegram 100

Manager’s salary 2,000 4,750

III Cost of Production 63,750

(+) Opening stock of finished goods Nil

(-) Closing stock of finished goods Nil

IV Cost of Goods Sold

Page 236: smu account assignment solved

Selling Overhead

Salesmen’s commission and salary 500

Travelling expenses 200

Advertising 500

Warehousing charges 200

Carriage outward 150 1550

V Cost of sales/ Total Cost 65,300

Illustration 4

A factory produces a standard product. The following information is given to you from which you are required to prepare a cost sheet of January 2000.

Rs

Raw materials 91,000

Direct wages 29,000

Other direct expanse 11,000

Factory overheads 80% of direct wages

Office overheads 10% of works cost

Selling and distribution expenses Rs. 2 per unit sold

Units produced and sold during the month 10,000

Also find the selling price per unit on the basis that profit mark up is uniformly made to yield a profit of 20% of the selling price. There was no stock or work-in progress either at the beginning or at the end of the period.

Page 237: smu account assignment solved

Solution:

Cost Sheet for the period ………

Total

Direct Materials 91,000

Direct Wages 29,000

Direct expenses 11,000

I Prime Cost 1,31,000

(+) Factory overhead

80% of direct wages 23,200

II Factory or Works Cost 1,54,200

(+) Office overhead

10% of work cost office overhead 15,420

III Cost of Production/Cost of goods sold 1,69,620

Selling and distribution 2 units (10,000) 20,000

IV Cost of Sales 1,89,620

Profit 25% on selling price #

47405

V Sales 2,37,025

# Working Notes:

Profit is 20% of selling price.

If selling price is 100 profit is 20. Therefore cost price is 80.

If cost price is 80, profit is 20 or 25% (100 x (20/80)

Page 238: smu account assignment solved

If cost price is Rs.189620, profit is Rs.47405 (189620 x (25/100)

Illustration 5

The following data are related to the manufacture of a standard product during the month of July 2009.

Raw Materials consumed Rs.15,000

Direct Wages Rs. 9,000

Machine hours worked 900 hours

Machine hours rate Rs.5

Administrative overheads 20% of works cost

Selling overheads Re.0.50 per unit

Units produced 17,100

Units Sold 16,000 @ Rs.4 per unit

You are required to prepare a cost sheet from the above showing:

1. The cost per unit2. The profit per unit sold and profit for the period.

Solution:

Illustration 6:

Page 239: smu account assignment solved

Vijay industries manufactures a product X. On 1st Jan 2007, there were 5000 units of finished product in stock.

Work-in-progress Rs. 57,400

Raw materials Rs. 1,16,200

The information available from cost records for the year ended 31st Dec 2007 was as follows:

Direct material 9,06,900

Direct Labour 3 ,26,400

Freight on R M purchased 55,700

Indirect labour 1,21,600

Other factory overhead 3,17,300

Stock on Raw Materials on 31st Dec 2007 96,400

Work-in-progress on 31st Dec 2007 78,200

Sales (1,50,000 units) 30,00,000

Indirect materials 2,13,900

There are 15000 units of finished stock in hand on 31st Dec 2007. You are required to prepare:

A statement of cost and profit assuming that opening stock of finished goods is to be valued at the same cost per unit as the finished stock at the end of the period.

Solution

Page 240: smu account assignment solved

Working Notes:

Illustration 7

Prepare the cost sheet to show the total cost of production and cost per unit of goods manufactured by a company for the month of Jan 2005. Also find out the cost of sales.

Rs.

Rs.

Stock of raw materials as on 1-1-2005

3,000 Office rent 500

Raw materials purchased 28,000 General expenses (admn)

400

Stock of raw materials as on 31-1-2005

4,500 Discount on shares & debentures

300

Manufacturing wages 7,000 Advertisement expenses to be charged fully

600

Depreciation on plant 1,500 Income tax paid 2,000

Page 241: smu account assignment solved

Loss on sale of a part of plant

300

Factory rent and rates 3,000

The number of units produced during Jan 2005 was 3,000. The opening and closing stock of finished goods was 200 and 400 units respectively. The value of opening stock of finished goods is Rs.2800.

Solution:

Note: Loss on sale of a part of plant is a capital loss hence excluded in cost sheet. So also Discount on Shares & Debentures, and Income tax paid should not be excluded in cost sheet.

11.10 Summary

Costing is the process of determining the cost of doing something, eg. cost of manufacturing an article, rendering a service or performing a function. Costing includes the techniques and processes of ascertaining cost.

CIMA defines the term cost as “the amount of expenditure (actual or notional) incurred on or attributable to a given thing”. The given thing may be taken as a product, service or any other activity.

Batch costing is the method used to determine the cost of a group of identical products. The batch consist of similar products is a unit and not a single item within the batch.

Contract costing is a method is based on the principle of job costing used by house builders and civil contractors. The contract becomes the cost unit for which relevant costs are determined

Page 242: smu account assignment solved

The elements of costs are classified as materials, labor and expenses. These three elements of cost would be grouped in to direct and indirect categories.

11.11 Terminal Questions

Problem 1:

The following extract refers to a commodity for the half year ending 31st March 2008. Prepare a cost statement.

Purchase of raw materials

1, 20,000 Direct wages 1, 00,000

Rent, rate, insurance and Works expenses

40,000Opening stock

Raw materials

Finished goods (1000 units)

20,000

16,000

Work in progress:

opening

closing

4, 800

16, 000

Closing stock:

raw material

F. Goods (2,000 tons)

22, 240

Carriage inwards 1, 440 Sale of finished goods 3, 00,000

Cost of factory 8,000.

Advertising, discounts allowed and selling costs Re.1 per ton sold. Production during the year is 16,000 tons. Prepare a cost sheet.

Problem 2:

Calculate the cost of raw materials purchased: Opening stock of raw materials Rs.10,000. Closing stock of raw materials Rs.15,000. Expenses on purchases Rs.5,000. Direct wages Rs.50, 000 Prime cost s Rs.1, 00,000.

Problem 3:

The cost data is as follows:

Raw materials consumed Rs.1,82,000. Direct wages Rs.40,000. Chargeable expenses Rs.20,000. Opening stock of finished goods (1,000 units) Rs.32,000. Closing stock 2,000 units. Factory overheads 100 % of direct labor. Office overheads 10% of works cost. Selling of Distribution

Page 243: smu account assignment solved

expenses Rs.4 per unit sold. Units produced 10,000. Profit mark-up 20% on selling price. Prepare a cost sheet.

11.12 Answer to SAQ’s and TQ’s

1. Assets

2. Batch costing, Contract Costing and Composite costing

3. Unit costing, Operating costing and Operation costing

4. True

5. Absorption costing

6. Direct costing

7. Sunk Cost

Answers to Terminal Questions

Solution: 1

*To be valued only at number of units sold. Opening stock of finished goods + production minus closing stock = Number of units sold.

** Always to be valued at number of units sold. Number of units sold x Selling price per

Solution: 2

Page 244: smu account assignment solved

Computation of cost of raw materials purchased

Opening Stock of raw materials 10,000

Add Purchases X

Expenses on purchases 5,000

15,000 + X

Less closing stock of raw materials -15,000

Raw materials consumed X

Direct wages 50,000

Prime Cost 50,000 + X

Prime cost given in the problem is Rs.1,00,000

Hence substituting, 1,00,000 = 50,000 + X; Therefore X = Rs.50,000

Cost of Raw Materials purchased is Rs.50,000

Solution: 3

Activity 1 : Solution

Page 245: smu account assignment solved

Copyright © 2009 SMU

Powered by Sikkim Manipal University

.

MB0041-Unit-12-Marginal Costing and Break Even Analysis

Unit-12-Marginal Costing and Break Even Analysis

Structure:

12.1 Introduction

Objectives

12.2 Concept of Marginal Costing

12.3 Characteristics of Marginal Costing

12.4 Difference between Absorption Costing and Marginal Costing

12.5 Marginal Cost

12.6 Contribution

12.7 Cost Volume Profit (CVP) Analysis

Page 246: smu account assignment solved

12.8 Break Even Chart

12.9 Break Even Point

12.10 Profit Volume ratio or MCSR

12.11 Target profit

12.12 Margin of Safety

12.13 Application of Marginal cost

12.14 Limitations of Marginal cost

12.15 Solved Problems

12.16 Summary

12.17 Terminal Questions

12.18 Answers to SAQs and TQs

12.1 Introduction

In the previous unit we learnt about understanding cost. Costing is the process of determining the cost of doing something. Costing includes the techniques and processes of ascertaining cost. We dealt with different methods of costing, different techniques of costing and finally classification of costs under various heads.

Marginal Cost determines the rate of change in costs if the volume of output is increased or decreased by one unit Marginal costing a technique of costing concerned with the changes in costs and profits resulting from changes in the volume of output. Marginal costing is very helpful in decision making and it most widely used profit planning techniques. The cost volume profit analysis shows the relationship among unit sale price, variable cost, sales volume, sales mix and fixed cost.

Objectives:

After studying this unit, you should be able to:

1. Explain the concept of Marginal costing.

2. Distinguish between Marginal Costing and Absorption Costing

3. Describe contribution and its advantages

Page 247: smu account assignment solved

4. Familiarize with cost volume profit analysis, break even chart, and break even point.

5. Understand the contribution marginal approach, target profit and margin of safety.

12.2. Concept of Marginal Costing

According to Institute of Cost and Management Accounting, London Marginal costing is defined as “the ascertainment of marginal cost and of the effect on profit of changes in volume or type of output by differentiating between fixed costs and variable cost”. Marginal costing a technique of costing concerned with the changes in costs and profits resulting from changes in the volume of output. Marginal costing is also known as ‘Variable Costing’.

12.3 Characteristics of Marginal Costing

The technique of marginal costing is based on the distinction between product costs and period costs. Only the variable costs are regarded as the cost of the product while the fixed cost is treated as period costs. The main characteristics of marginal costing are:

1. It is a technique of analysis and determination of costs to help management in decision making

2. All elements of costs are classified into variable and fixed components. Even semi variable costs are classified into variable and fixed components.

3. The variable costs are regarded as the cost of the products

4. Fixed costs are treated as period cost and are charged to profit and loss account for the period for which they are incurred

5. The stock of finished goods and work-in-progress are valued at marginal costs only

Variable and Absorption costing are techniques of costing wherein variable costing considers only variable costs for the purpose of product costing, inventory valuation and for other important management decisions. In absorption costing, total costs are taken into consideration for these purposes. Direct material, direct labour and variable overheads constitute the only relevant costs in variable costing whereas the full/absorption costing technique recognizes fixed overheads also as a product costs in addition to material, labour and variable overheads.

The two techniques are not mutually exclusive. Full costing is needed while preparing income statements for external reporting and for tax purpose while variable costing is extensively used for internal purpose in decision making.

Self Assessment Questions

1. Elements of costs are classified into ______ and ______

2. Fixed Cost is treated as __________ and charged to P& L account

Page 248: smu account assignment solved

3. _____________ costs are treated as product cost.

4. The _____________shows the relationship among unit sale price, variable cost, sales volume, sales mix and fixed cost

Illustration 1

Hydro Electric Ltd furnishes the following information from its cost records for the first quarter of the current year

Normal production (units) 1,000

Actual production (units) 1,100

Actual overheads per quarter at normal production

4,000

Other expenses per quarter 300

Standard fixed overhead rate per unit 4

Variable costs per unit 6

Sales volume (selling price is Rs. 14) NIL

Prepare the income statement under absorption and variable costing

Solution:

Income statement (Absorption Costing)

Particulars Amount Amount

Sales revenue

Nil

Less : Total cost of manufacturing:

Variable costs (1,100 x Rs. 6) Rs. 6,600

Fixed overheads (1,100 x Rs. 4) 4,400

Page 249: smu account assignment solved

11,000

Less : Cost of inventory at the end of the year (1,100 x Rs.10)

11,000 Nil

Cost of goods manufactured and sold

Gross margin (unadjusted)

Nil

Capacity variance (favorable) (over-absorbed 100 x Rs. 4)

Rs. 400

Gross margin (adjusted)

400

Less : Other expenses

300

Net income before taxes

100

Income Statement (Variable Costing)

Particulars Amount Amount

Sales revenue

Nil

Less : Variable costs (production costs) (1,100 x Rs. 6 )

Rs. 6,600

Less : Cost of inventory at the end to the year (1,100 x Rs 6)

6,600

Cost of goods manufactured and sold

Nil

Contribution

Nil

Less: Fixed costs:

Fixed overheads 4,000

Other expenses 300 Rs. (4,300)

Page 250: smu account assignment solved

Net income before taxes (loss)

(4,300)

Inference: Under absorption costing, the net income before taxes is Rs.100 while in marginal costing net income before taxes is (Rs.4300) (loss).This significant difference can be attributed to the fact that under absorption costing the fixed manufacturing overheads are included in inventory, whereas in variable costing, inventory carries only variable costs

Inventory valuation under absorption costing – 11000

Inventory valuation under variable costing – 6600

Difference – 4400

(This difference is equal to difference between Net income before taxes under absorption costing and variable costing)

12.4 Difference between Absorption Costing and Marginal Costing

Absorption Costing Marginal Costing

It is known as full costing. Both fixed and variable are included to ascertain the cost

Only variable costs are included. Fixed costs are recovered from contribution.

Different unit costs are obtained at different levels of output because of fixed expenses remaining the same

Marginal cost per unit remain same at different levels of output because variable expenses vary in the same proportion in which output varies

Difference between sales and total cost (marginal cost and fixed cost) is profit

Difference between sales and marginal cost is contribution and difference between contribution and fixed cost is profit or loss

A portion of fixed cost is carried forward to the next period because closing stock of work-in-progress and finished goods is valued at cost of production which is inclusive of fixed cost

Stock of work-in-progress and finished goods are valued at marginal cost. Fixed cost of a particular period is charged to that very period and is not carried over to the next period.

Page 251: smu account assignment solved

The apportionment of fixed expenses on an arbitrary basis gives rise to over or under absorption of overheads

Only variable cost are charged to products hence marginal costing does not lead to over or under absorption of fixed overheads.

It affects managerial decisions in the areas such as whether to accept the export order or not, whether to buy or manufacture etc

It is very helpful in taking managerial decisions because it takes into consideration the additional cost involved only assuming fixed expenses remaining constant.

Costs are classified according to functional basis such as production cost, office and administrative cost and selling and distribution costs

Costs are classified according to the behavior of costs – fixed costs and variable costs.

It fails to establish relationship of cost, volume and profit

CVP relationship is an integral part of marginal costing.

12.5 Marginal Cost

According to C.I.M.A. London, “Marginal Cost means the amount at any given volume of output by which aggregate costs are changed if the volume of output is increased or decreased by one unit”. Marginal cost per unit remains unchanged irrespective of the level of activity or output. It is also known as Variable Cost. Marginal cost is the sum total of direct material cost, direct labor cost, variable direct expenses and all variable overheads. The marginal cost of producing a unit declines as output increases.

Cost Drivers

The activities that cause costs to be incurred are called “Cost Drivers”. A fixed cost remains unchanged in total as the level of activity (cost drivers) varies. If activity increases or decreases say by 20 %, the total fixed costs remain the same e.g. depreciation, property tax, rent to landlord. But fixed costs per unit will change.

A variable cost changes in total in direct proportion to a change in the level of activity or cost driver. If activity increases, say by 20%, total variable cost also increases by 20 %. The total variable cost increases proportionately with activity. Variable cost is fixed per unit but varies in total.

12.6 Contribution

It is the difference between sales and variable cost. It may defined as ‘the excess of selling price over variable cost per unit’. It is also termed as Contribution Margin or Gross Margin

Page 252: smu account assignment solved

Advantages of contribution: The concept of contribution is a valuable aid to management in making managerial decisions. It includes

1. It helps the management in the fixation of selling prices

2. It assists in determining the break even point

3. It helps management in the selection of a suitable product mix for profit maximization

4. It helps in choosing from among alternative methods of production.

5. It helps the management in deciding whether to purchase or manufacture, add a new product or not etc.

Self Assessment Questions:

5. Fixed cost remains constant _________.

6. Those activities that results in cost are known as ___________.

7. Variable cost is fixed ______ but varies in________.

8. Contribution is also known as contribution margin or _____________.

9. Fixed cost – Loss = ______________

12.7 Cost Volume Profit (CVP) Analysis

This technique summarizes the effects of changes in an organization’s volume of activity on its costs, revenue and profit. CVP analysis can be extended to cover the effects on profit of changes in selling prices, changes in sales volume, changes in product mix etc. It provides management with a comprehensive overview of the effects on revenue and costs of all types of short run financial changes. Since CVP analysis explores the fundamental relationship between cost-volume-profit variables it becomes easier to recognize certain level of output or a certain volume of sales that equates cost with revenue. Such level is termed as breakeven point. Break even analysis is an integral part of CVP analysis.

12.8 Break Even Chart

Page 253: smu account assignment solved

It is a graphic or visual presentation of the relationship between costs, volume and profit. It indicates the point of production at which there is neither profit nor loss. It also indicates the estimated profit or loss at different levels of production. While constructing the chart, the following assumption is normally considered.

a) Costs are classified into fixed and variable costs

b) Fixed costs shall remain fixed during the relevant volume range of graph.

c) Variable cost per unit will remain constant during the relevant volume range of graph

d) Selling price per unit will remain constant

e) Sales mix remains constant.

f) Production and sales volume are equal

g) There exists a linear relationship between costs and revenue.

h) Linear relationship is indicated by way of straight line.

12.9 Break Even Point

BEP is the volume of activity where the organization’s revenues and expenses are equal. At a particular amount of sales, the organizations have no profit or loss: it normally breaks even.

The general formula for computing the break even sales volume in units is:

Illustration 2: Find the contribution and profit earned if the selling price per unit is Rs.25, variable cost per unit Rs.20 and fixed cost Rs.3,05,000 for the output of 80,000 units.

Solution:

Page 254: smu account assignment solved

Illustration 3: Calculate the profit earned for the data given: Fixed cost Rs.5,00,000; Variable cost Rs.10 per unit; Selling price Rs.15 per unit; Output 150,000 units

Solution:

Illustration 4: Find the fixed costs if sales is Rs.2,00,000; Variable Cost Rs. 40,000; and Profit Rs. 30,000.

Solution:

12.10 Profit / Volume Ratio or MCSR

It expresses the relationship between contribution and sales. It is also termed as Marginal Contribution Sales Ratio (MCSR).

Illustration 5: Calculate MCSR or P / V Ratio if the Marginal cost is Rs.24,000 and Sales is Rs. 60,000

Solution:

Illustration 6: The sales turnover and profit during two periods are as under:

Period 1 Period 2

Sales 20,000 30,000

Profit 2,000 4,000

Page 255: smu account assignment solved

Calculate the MCSR.

Solution:

Illustration 7 : Calculate MCSR from the following details

Total Sales Total Costs

Year ending 31st December 2006 22,23,000 19,83,600

Year ending 31st December 2007 24,51,000 21,43,200

Solution:

Illustration 8: Calculate the sales if marginal cost is Rs.2,400 & MCSR is 20 %.

Solution:

Illustration 9 : Find, Contribution and MCSR. Variable cost per unit Rs.40. Selling price per unit Rs.80. Fixed expenses Rs.2,00,000. Output 10,000 units.

Solution:

Illustration 10: Find the Break Even Point.

Page 256: smu account assignment solved

Selling Price per unit Rs.10

Fixed Cost 60,000

Variable cost per unit 5

Relevant range (units) : Lower limit 6000

: Upper limit 20,000

Break up of variable cost per unit:

Direct material Rs.2.00

Direct Labour Rs.1.50

Direct Expenses Re.1.00

Selling expense Re.0.50

Actual sales 18000 units 1,80,000

Plant capacity 20,000 units 2,00,000

Tax rate 50 per cent

Breakeven point lies at the point of intersection of sales line and total cost line. The vertical distance between the sales revenue and the total cost line measures the estimated net income (after BEP) and the estimated net loss (before BEP) at the related sales volume. The fixed cost line is parallel to the horizontal axis. The variable cost line is superimposed on the fixed cost line and moves upward uniformly with sales volume at the variable cost to volume ratio.

Page 257: smu account assignment solved

12.11 Target Profit

Based on the experiences gained, an organization may intend to increase the production and sales. When an organization was to be on its optimum level, a direction will be provided to achieve the maximum level. In this connection, if one intends to increase the current year production to higher levels, no variable expenses would be incurred. A target net profit or income may be decided in advance. To achieve this profit, efforts will be made to effect sales. The problem of computing the volume of sales required to earn a particular target net profit is very similar to the problem of finding the break even point. After all, the break even point is the number of unit sales required to earn a target net profit of zero. The target net profit is known as “desired profit”. The formula is:

Illustration 11: Calculate sales in units and in rupees:

Units produced 60,000.

Fixed Expenses – Rs.1,50,000

Selling price per unit – Rs.15.

Variable cost per unit – Rs.10

Profits to be earned – Rs.87,500.

Solution:

12.12 Margin of Safety

Page 258: smu account assignment solved

The safety margin of an enterprise is the /difference between the budgeted sales revenue and the break even sales revenue. The safety margin gives management a feel for how close projected operations are to the organization’s break even point. The formula is:

Illustration 12: Calculate BEP and MOS:

Sales – 50,000 units per annum.

Selling price – Rs.6.00 per unit,

Prime cost – Rs.3.00 per unit.

Variable overheads – Re.1.00 per unit.

Fixed cost – Rs.75,000 per annum.

Solution:

12.13 Applications of Marginal Costs

The marginal costing helps the management in taking many policy decisions. The vital areas where these concepts are applied directly are as follows:

Level of activity planning: Normally, the managements will consider different levels of production or selling activities to decide optimum level of activity. Such periodic exercise shall put the organization in the right tract to achieve its goal. Since the optimum level of activity results in the maximum contribution per unit, the planning can become a perfect execution tool.

Alternative methods of production: With the help of marginal costing techniques, it’s possible to undertake decision about the alternate methods of production. All the decisions should be focused at the greater contribution so that profit can be maintained at a balanced level.

Make or buy decision: Depending upon the situational ambience, the management can have a blue print on a vital decision. Management can think of outsourcing the production activities or

Page 259: smu account assignment solved

to undertake it within its purview. Based on the comparative statement of cost of manufacture with the purchase price, decisions can be taken.

Fixation of Selling Price: While pricing a product, the marginal costing techniques can come handy. While fixing a price for a product, it is prudent to take into account the recovery of marginal cost in addition to get a reasonable contribution to cover fixed overheads. Pricing will be at ease once the marginal cost and overall profitability of the concern are known.

Selection of optimum sales mix: The product mix plays an important role when a firm produces more than one product. The main focus will on profit maximization. With the help of marginal costing techniques, it is possible to decide the best product mix which will result in maximum profits to the firm.

New Product introduction: When a firm intends to diversify its activities or to expand its existing markets, with the help of marginal costing techniques. By fixing the time horizon to recover the fixed costs and profit, decisions can be taken for the introduction of new products.

Balancing of profits: As the economic trends gets changed on account of government fiscal policies and regulations, competition at the regional, national, and international levels, marginal costing techniques can aid to bring out facts with regard to maintaining a desired level of profits.

Final balancing decisions: If the sales of the product were not encouraging to cover the fixed costs, it is quite natural that the firm may decide about its continuance. This may lead to dovetailing or completely closing down the operations. Marginal costing helps the management to take a sound decision.

12.14 Limitations of Marginal Costing

There are certain limitations which can be described as follows:

Suitability: The techniques of marginal costing cannot be applied to all the concerns. When a concern needs to carry large stocks by way of work-in-progress, the technique becomes redundant In addition; the marginal costing techniques are not suitable to industries working on contract basis.

Inventory valuation difficulties: Since the work in progress and the closing inventories are valued at marginal cost basis, it will not be a sound decision from the Balance Sheet point of view. The main focus on the ‘true and fair value’ concept gets diluted and the very purpose of exhibiting the financial position will get defeated.

Segregation of costs: Though the marginal costing principles call for the differentiation of costs into fixed and variable, in actual practice it becomes difficult to classify them precisely. Many overheads which are appear to be fixed and variable may not exactly align at various levels of production. There is no logical method to segregate semi-variable expenses into fixed and variable.

Page 260: smu account assignment solved

Time factor: The marginal costing ignores the time factor which is very important in all managerial decisions. Ignoring the time value factor would naturally relate to unreliable and incomplete basis for comparing two alternative jobs.

Sales emphasis: Marginal costing principles are basically a sales-oriented concept. While the selling function gets the prominence, other functions are not given equal weight age. This would be a major setback.

12.15 Solved Problems

Problem 1: Calculate Break even point. Fixed costs Rs.80,000; Variable cost per unit Rs.4. Sales Rs.2,00,000. The number of units involved coincides with expected volume of output. Each unit sells at Rs.20.

Solution:

BEP in units = Fixed expenses / contribution per unit

Contribution = S – V or Rs.20 – Rs.4 or Rs.16

= Rs.80,000 / Rs.16 or 5,000 units.

Problem 2: Calculate the Break Even point: Sales Rs.2,00,000; Fixed expenses Rs.50,000. Variable expenses. Rs.1,00,000.

Solution: Since no information about the number of units produced and costs per unit is given, only Break even point in value can be ascertained.

BEP in Rs. = Fixed costs x Total sales / Total Sales – Variable costs

= 50,000 x 2,00,000 / 2,00,000 – 1,00,000

= Rs.1,00,000

Problem 3: Calculate MCSR and Break Even Point: Sales Rs.5,00,000. Fixed Costs Rs.1,00,000. Profit Rs.1,50,000.

Solution:

MCSR = Contribution / Sales

Contribution = Fixed Costs + Profit

= Rs.1,00,000 + Rs.1,50,000 = Rs.2,50,000

MCSR = 2,50,000 / 5,00,000 = 50%

Page 261: smu account assignment solved

BEP in Rs. = Fixed Costs / MCSR

= 1,00,000 / 50 % or Rs.2,00,000.

Problem 4: Find BEP. Variable cost per unit Rs.12. Selling price per unit Rs.20. Fixed expenses Rs.60,000. What will be the selling price per unit if the BEP is brought down to 6000 units?

Solution:

BEP in units = FC / CPU

CPU = S – V 20 – 12 or Rs.8

= 60,000 / 8 or 7,500 units

BEP in Rs = 7,500 units x Rs.20

= Rs.1,50,000.

The Selling price = FC / CPU or FC / (SP – VP) per unit

(at BEP – 6000 units) = 60,000 / (x – 12)

6,000 = 60,000 / x – 12

6000 (x – 12) = 60,000

X = Rs.22 on simplification.

Problem 5: Calculate the following

(1) MCSR.

(2) Profit when sales are Rs.20,000

(3) New BEP if selling price is reduced by 20 %.

Given Fixed expenses Rs.4,000 and Break Even Point Rs.10,000.

Solution:

(1) BEP sales = FC / MCSR

MCSR = FC / BEP Sales

= 4,000 / 10,000 x 100

Page 262: smu account assignment solved

= 40 %.

(2) To calculate profit we need to find out contribution.

MCSR = Contribution /Sales

40% = Contribution / 20,000

40 % x 20,000 = Contribution

Rs.8,000 = Contribution

Contribution = Fixed cost + Profit

8,000 = 4,000 + Profit

4,000 = Profit

(3) New BEP is Selling Price is reduced by 20 %

Let the original Selling Price be Rs.x.

Therefore, at 20 % reduction, the reduction would be [0.2x]

Hence the revised SP would be x – 0.2x or 0.8x

Variable cost = 1- Contribution Margin

= 1-0.4 = 0.6

New contribution = S – V

= 0.8x – 0.6x = 0.2x.

Sales Ratio = 0.2x / 0.8x or 0.25

BEP in volume = 4,000 / 0.25 or Rs.16,000

Problem 6: Given fixed cost is Rs.8,000. Profit earned Rs.2,000 and BEP sales Rs.40,000. Find the actual sales.

Solution:

MCSR is based on BEP sales

BEP sales = FC / MCSR

Page 263: smu account assignment solved

MCSR = FC / BEP sales or 8,000 / 40,000 = 0.2

Actual sales = FC + desired profit / MCSR

= 8,000 + 2,000 /0.2

= Rs. 50,000

12.16 Summary

Marginal Cost determines the rate of change in costs if the volume of output is increased or decreased by one unit Marginal costing a technique of costing concerned with the changes in costs and profits resulting from changes in the volume of output.

The technique of marginal costing is based on the distinction between product costs and period costs. Only the variable costs are regarded as the cost of the product while the fixed cost is treated as period costs.

Break even chart is a graphic or visual presentation of the relationship between costs, volume and profit. It indicates the point of production at which there is neither profit nor loss. It also indicates the estimated profit or loss at different levels of production.

CVP analysis provides management with a comprehensive overview of the effects on revenue and costs of all types of short run financial changes.

12.17 Terminal Questions

1. A factory is manufacturing sewing machines. The variable cost of each machine is Rs.200 and each machine is sold for Rs.250. Fixed costs are Rs.12,000. Calculate the BEP for output.

2. Calculate break even point and margin of safety. Fixed cost Rs.1,60,000. Variable cost per unit Rs.2 and Selling price per unit Rs.18. Also compute the margin of safety if the company is earning a profit of Rs.36,000.

3. Calculate the break-even point and turnover required to earn a profit of Rs.3,600. Fixed overheads Rs.1,80,000. Variable cost per unit Rs.2 Selling price Rs.20. If the company is earning a profit of Rs.36,000, express the margin of safety available to it.

4. Given variable cost Rs.6,00,000. Fixed cost Rs.3,00,000. Net profit Rs.1,00,000. Sales Rs.10,00,000. Find (a) MCSR (b) BEP (c) Profit when sales amounted Rs.12,00,000 (d) sales required to earn a profit of Rs.2,00,000.

5. Given: Fixed costs Rs.4,000. Break even sales Rs.20,000. Profit Rs.1,000. Selling price per unit Rs.20. Calculate (a) sales and marginal cost of sales (b) new break even point if selling price is reduced by 10 %.

Page 264: smu account assignment solved

6. Find the margin of safety if profit is Rs.20,000 and MCSR is 40 %.

7. Calculate Break even sales and margin of safety. Given Sales Rs.10,00,000.Fixed costs Rs.3,00,000 and Profit Rs.2,00,000.

8. Given Sales Rs.20,000. Total Costs Rs.16,000 and Variable Costs Rs.12,000. Compute Break even sales, Margin of safety and sales to earn a profit of Rs.4,000.

12.18 Answer Self Assessment Questions

1. Variable cost , fixed cost

2. Period cost

3. Variable

4. CVP analysis

5. In total

6. Cost drivers

7. Per unit, total

8. Gross margin

9. Contribution

Answer for Terminal Questions

1. Contribution = S –V

= 250 – 200 or Rs.50

Therefore BEP = FC / Contribution

= 12,000 / 500 or 240 units.

2. Contribution = S – V

= 18 – 2 = 16.

BEP in units = Fixed costs / contribution per unit

= 1,60,000 / 16

= 10,000 units.

Margin of safety = Actual Sales (-) Break-even sales

Actual sales = Fixed Cost + Desired profit / contribution per unit

= 1,60,000 + 36,000 / 16 or 12,250 units.

Margin of safety = 12,250 -10,000 units or 2,250 units.

Page 265: smu account assignment solved

3. Contribution per unit = S – V or 20 – 2 = 18.

BEP in Units = FC / CPU

= 1,80,000 / 18 = 10,000 units.

Break even sales = BEP in units x Selling price

= 10,000 x Rs.20

= Rs.2,00,000

Sales required to earn a profit of Rs.36,000

Sales ( required) = Total Fixed overheads + Profit desired] / CPU

= 1,80,000 + 36,000 / 18

= 216000/18 =12,000 units

Sales ( in Rs) = 12,000 x Rs.20 = Rs.2,40,000.

Margin of safety = Actual sales – Break even sales

= Rs. 2,40,000 – Rs.2,00,000

= Rs.40,000

in terms of units = 12,000 – 10,000 units

= 2,000 units.

4. MCSR = Contribution / Sales x 100

= Contribution = S – V or Rs.4,00,000.

= 4,00,000 / 10,00,000 x 100 or 40%

Break even point = FC / MCSR = 3,00,000 / 0.4 = Rs.7,50,000

Profit when sales amounted to Rs.12,00,000. Contribution 40%

Therefore total contribution

12,00,000 x 40 % = Rs.4,80,000

Page 266: smu account assignment solved

Less fixed costs Rs.3,00,000

Profit = Rs.1,80,000

Sales to earn a profit

of Rs.2,00,000 = FC + Desired profit / MCSR

= 3,00,000 + 2,00,000 / 40 %

= Rs.12,50,000.

5. BEP = Fixed costs / MCSR

20,000 = 4,000 / MCSR

MCSR = 4,000 / 20,000 x 100 = 20%

Contribution = Fixed cost +Profit

= 4,000 + 1,000

= Rs.5,000.

MCSR = Contribution / Sales x 100

20 = 5,000 / Sales x 100

= Rs. 25,000

Marginal cost of sales = Sales – Contribution or 25,000 – 5,000

= Rs.20,000

If selling price is reduced by 10 %

New selling price = 20 – 2 = Rs.18

Variable cost = Rs.16 (20 – 20% of 20)

Contribution = Rs.2

New MCSR = 2 /18 x 100.

New break even sales= FC /SR or 4,000 / 100

Page 267: smu account assignment solved

= Rs.36,000.

6. Margin of safety = Profit / 40 % = Rs.50,000

7. MCSR = Contribution / sales

= 5,00,000 / 10,00,000 = 50 %.

Break even sales = Fixed costs / MCSR

= 3,00,000 / 50 %

= Rs.6,00,000

Margin of safety = Profit / MCSR

= 2,00,000 / 50 %

= Rs.4,00,000

8. Sales 20,000, Variable cost Rs.13,000, Total Cost Rs.16,000.

Therefore, Fixed cost = Total cost – variable cost = 16,000 – 12,000 = Rs.4,000.

Profit = Contribution – Fixed Cost = 8,000 –

4,000 = 4,000.

MCSR = Contribution / sales = 8,000 / 20,000 = 40 %.

BEP in units = FC / MCSR = 4,000 / 40% = 10,000.

Margin of safety = Profit / MCSR = 400 / 40 % = 10,000

Sales to earn a profit of Rs.4,000 = FC + Desired profit / MCSR

= 4,000 + 4,000 / 40 % = Rs.20,000.

Copyright © 2009 SMU

Powered by Sikkim Manipal University

.

Page 268: smu account assignment solved

MB0041-Unit-13-Decisions Involving Alternative Choices

Unit-13-Decisions Involving Alternative Choices

Structure:

13.1 Introduction

Objectives

13.2 Decision Making

13.3 Types of Costs

13.4 Types of Choices Decisions

13.5 Make or Buy Decisions

13.6 Addition / Discontinuance of a Product line

Page 269: smu account assignment solved

13.7 Sell or Process Further

13.8 Operate or Shut down

13.9 Exploring New Markets

13.10 Maintaining a desired level of profit

13.11 Summary

13.12 Terminal Questions

13.13 Answers to SAQs and TQs

13.1 Introduction

In the previous unit we learnt about Marginal Costing. Marginal costing is the ascertainment of marginal cost and of the effect on profit of changes in volume by differentiating between fixed costs and variable costs. Marginal cost is the amount at any given volume of output by which aggregate costs are changed if the volume of output is increased or decreased by one unit. Marginal costing is a very useful tool for management because of its applications. It is used in providing assistance to the management in vital decision-making both short term and long term. Differential analysis is the process of estimating the consequences of alternative actions that a decision maker may take. It is used both for short term and long term decisions. Short term decisions relates to fixing price for the product, selecting a suitable product mix, diversification of the product etc while long term deals with capital budgeting decisions.

Objectives

After studying this unit, you should be able to:

· Explain the steps involved in decision making process

· Know various types of decision choices

· Analyze and interpret various decision choices

13.2 Decision Making

Decision making is the process of evaluating two or more alternatives leading to a final choice known as alternative choice decisions. Decision making is closely associated with planning for the future and is directed towards a specific objective or goal. Decision model contains the following decision-making steps or elements:

1. Identify and define the problem

Page 270: smu account assignment solved

2. Identify alternative as possible solutions to the problem.

3. Eliminate alternatives that are clearly not feasible

4. Collect relevant data (costs and benefits) associated with each feasible alternative

5. Identify cost and benefits as relevant or irrelevant and eliminate irrelevant costs and benefits from consideration.

6. Identify to the extent possible, non-financial advantage and disadvantage about each feasible alternative.

7. Total the relevant cost and benefits for each alternative

8. Select the alternative with the greatest overall benefits to make a decision

9. Implement or execute the decision

10. Evaluate the results of the decision made.

13.3 Types of Costs

A decision involves selecting among various choices. Non routine types of decisions are crucial and critical to the firm as it involves huge investments and involve much uncertainty. Short term decision making is based on relevant data obtained from accounting information.

· Relevant Cost are costs which would change as a result of the decision.

· Opportunity costs are monetary benefits foregone for not pursuing the alternative course. When a decision to follow one course of action is made, the opportunity to pursue some other course is foregone.

· Sunk costs are historical cost that cannot be recovered in a given situation. These costs are irrelevant in decision making.

· Avoidable costs are costs that can be avoided in future as a result of managerial choice. It is also known as discretionary costs. These costs are relevant in decision making.

· Incremental / Differential costs are costs that include variable costs and additional fixed costs resulting from a particular decision. They are helpful in finding out the profitability of increased output and give a better measure than the average cost.

Self Assessment Questions:

1. Relevant Costs are costs which would _________as a result of the decision.

Page 271: smu account assignment solved

2. ___________ are historical cost that cannot be recovered in a given situation.

3. Opportunity costs are _________________for not pursuing the alternative course

4. ____________ is also known as discretionary cost.

13.4 Types of Choices Decisions

The application of incremental / differential costs and revenues for decision making is known as decision situations or types of choice decisions.

· Make or Buy decisions

· Selection of a suitable product mix

· Effect of change in price

· Maintaining a desired level of profit

· Diversification of products

· Closing down or suspending activities

· Alternative course of action

· Own or Lease

· Retain or Replace

· Change or Status quo

· Export or Local sales

· Expand or Contract

· Take or Refuse order

· Place special orders

· Select sales territories

· Sell at split-up point or process further.

13.5 Make or Buy Decisions

Page 272: smu account assignment solved

Make or buy decisions arise when a company with unused production capacity consider the following alternatives

a) To buy certain raw materials or subassemblies from outside suppliers

b) To use available capacity to produce the items within the company.

c) The quality and type of item which affects the production schedule

d) The space required for the production of item

e) Any transportation involved due to the location of production facility

f) Cost of acquiring special know how required for the item.

Illustration 1: The Anchor Company Ltd produces most of its electrical parts in its own plant. The company is at present considering the feasibility of buying a part from an outside supplier for Rs. 4.5 per part. If this were done, monthly costs would increase by Rs. 1,000

The part under consideration is manufactured in Department 1 along with numerous other parts. On account of discontinuing the production of this part, Department 1 would have somewhat reduced operations. The average monthly usage production of this part is 20,000 units. The costs of producing this part on per unit basis are as follows.

Material Rs. 1.80

Labour (half-hour) 2.40

Fixed overheads 0.80

Total costs 5.00

Solution

The company should continue the practice of producing the part in Department1.

Page 273: smu account assignment solved

Illustration 2: ABC ltd plans utilize its idle capacity by making components parts instead of buying them from suppliers. The following are the data available for decision to make or buy:

Direct Material

Direct Labour

Variable manufacturing overhead

Unit cost

12.5

8.0

5.0

The company purchases the part at a unit cost of Rs.30. The company has been operating at 75% of normal capacity. Fixed manufacturing cost is 17 lakhs. The cost to manufacture 50000 units is:

Unit cost Total cost

Direct material 12.5 6,25,000

Direct labour 8.0 4,00,000

Variable manufacturing o/h 5.0 2,50,000

Total incremental cost 25.5 12,75,000

Cost to purchase part 30.0 15,00,000

Net advantage in parts production 4.5 2,25,000

Inference: The total incremental cost by producing the part in-house is Rs. 25.50 while the cost incurred on purchase of the part from suppliers is Rs. 30.00. There is a clear advantage to the company to produce the part in-house.

13.6 Addition or Discontinuance of a Product line or Process

The decision to add or eliminate an unprofitable product is a special case of product profitability evaluation. When a firm is divided into multiple sales outlets, product lines, divisions, departments it may have to evaluate their individual performance to decide whether or not to continue operations of each of these segments.

Illustration 3: The Hi-tech Manufacturing Company is presently evaluating two possible processes for the manufacture of a toy, and makes available to you the following information:

Page 274: smu account assignment solved

ParticularProcess A

Rs.

Process B

Rs.

Variable cost per unit 12 14

Sales price per unit 20 20

Total fixed costs per year 30,00,000 21,00,000

Capacity (in units) 4,30,000 5,00,000

Anticipated sales (next year, in units) 4,00,000 4,00,000

You are required to suggest:

i) Which process should be chosen? Substantiate your answer.

ii) Would you change your answer as given above if you were informed that the capacities of the two processes are as follows: A 6, 00,000 units; B 5, 00,000 units? Why? Substantiate your answer.

Solution

Comparative Profitability Statement

Particular

Process A

Rs.

Process B

Rs.

(i) Selling price per unit 20 20

Variable cot per unit 12 14

Contribution per unit 8 6

Total annual contribution (as per anticipated sales)

32,00,000 24,00,000

Total fixed costs per year 30,00,000 21,00,000

Total Income 2,00,000 3,00,000

Page 275: smu account assignment solved

Process B may be chosen

Total contribution (if utilized to present capacity and sold)

34,40,000 30,00,000

Less : Fixed costs 30,00,000 21,00,000

Total Income 4,40,000 9,00,000

Process B may be chosen

(ii) Total contribution (if capacity of A of 6,00,000 units and of B 5,00,000 units)

48,00,000 30,00,000

Less : Fixed costs 30,00,000 21,00,000

Total Income 18,00,000 9,00,000

Process A may be chosen.

Illustration 4: Addition of second shift

Ulfa Ltd produces a single product in its plant. This product sells for Rs. 100 per unit. The standard production cost per unit is as follows:

Raw materials (5 kgs @ Rs. Rs. 40

Direct labour (2 hours @ Rs. 5) 10

Variable manufacturing overheads 10

Fixed manufacturing overheads 20

80

The plant is currently operating at full capacity of 1, 00,000 units per years on a single shift. This output is inadequate to meet the projected sales manager has estimated that the firm will lose sales of 40,000 units next years if the capacity is not expanded

Plant capacity could be doubled by adding a second shift. This would require additional out-of-pocket fixed manufacturing overhead costs of

Page 276: smu account assignment solved

Rs. 10,00,000 annually. Also, a night work wage premium equal to 25 per cent of the standard wage would have to be paid during the second shift. However, if annual production volume were 1,30,000 units or more, the company could take advantage of 2 per cent quantity discount on its raw material purchases.

You are required to advise whether it would be profitable to add the second shift in order to obtain the sales volume of 40,000 units per year?

Solution

Decision analysis

ParticularsProfit without expansion

Profits with expansion

Sales revenue Rs. 1,00,00,000 Rs. 1,40,00,000

Less: variable costs:

Raw materials (Rs 39.20 x 1,40,000) 40,00,000 54,88,000

Direct labour 10,00,000 15,00,000

Variable manufacturing overhead 10,00,000 14,00,000

Contribution 40,00,000 56,12,000

Less : fixed costs (Rs. 1,00,000 x 20) 20,00,000 30,00,000

Net Income 20,00,000 26,12,000

Yes, it would be profitable to add the second shift as it would increase profits by Rs. 6, 12,000.

Illustration 5: Assume a company is considering dropping product B from its line because accounting statements shows that product B is being sold at a loss.

Income Statement

Product A B C Total

Sales revenue 50,000 7,500 12,500 70,000

Page 277: smu account assignment solved

Cost of sales:

D. Material 7,500 1,000 1,500 10,000

D. Labour 15,000 2,000 2,500 19,500

Indirect manufacturing cost (50% of Direct labour)

7,500 1,000 1,250 9,750

Total 30,000 4,000 5,250 39,250

Gross margin On sales 20,000 3,500 7,250 30,750

Selling & Admn 12,500 4,500 4,000 21,000

Net income 7,500 (1,000) 3,250 9,750

Additional information:

a) Factory Overhead cost is made up of fixed cost of Rs.5850 and variable cost of Rs.3900.

b) Variable cost by products are: A – Rs 3000, B – Rs 400 and C – Rs 500

c) Fixed costs and expense will not be changed if product B is eliminated

d) Variable selling and administrative expenses are to the extent of Rs.11000 can be traced to the product: A-Rs.7,500; B- Rs.1500 and C- Rs.2000

e) Fixed selling and admn expense are Rs.10000

Solution:

Page 278: smu account assignment solved

If the sale of product B were discontinued, the marginal contribution would be lost and the net income would be reduced by Rs.2,600.

Assume that after dropping product B, the sales of product A increased by 10%. The total profit of the firm will not increase by this sales increase. Product A makes only a marginal contribution of 34% (17000/50000)

Sales revenue of Product A 50000 100%

Variable cost of Product A 33000 66%

Marginal contribution of Product A 17000 34%

On additional sales of Rs. 5000 the marginal contribution would be Rs.1700

Sales revenue 10% of 50000 5000

Variable cost 66% 3300

Marginal contribution (34%) 1700

This contribution is less than Rs. 2,600 now being realized on the sales of product B. it would take additional sales of product A of approximately Rs. 7,647 to equal the marginal contribution of Rs. 2,600 mow being made by product B:

= Rs. 7,647

It is possible that dropping product B may result in reduction in some of the fixed costs. Products B now contributes Rs. 2,600 towards recovery of fixed costs and expenses. Only if the fixed costs and expenses can be reduced by more than this amount, it will be advisable to drop product B.

13.7 Sells or Process Further

A firm is frequently faced with the problem of continuing with the existing policies or plans or change to new ones. Such change could be in the form of selling a partially processed product (semi finished) or process further. While taking a decision about such matters, the management must keep in mind the long term consequence and the interest of the firm.

Illustration 6: A firm sells semi finished product at Rs. 9 per unit. The cost to manufacture the semi finished product is Rs. 6. Further processing can be done at an additional cost of Rs.3 per

Page 279: smu account assignment solved

unit and the final product can be sold at Rs. 15 per unit. The firm can produce 10,000 units. The analysis is shown below:

Sell Process & Sell

Sales revenue (10,000 units) Rs. 90,000 1,50,000

Less : Manufacturing costs 60,000 90,000

Profit 30,000 60,000

There is a net advantage of Rs. 30,000 in processing the product further. The market value of the partially processed product (Rs. 90,000) is considered to be opportunity cost of further processing. The figure of net advantage of Rs. 30.000 can be arrived at in the following manner also:

Revenue from sale of final product (10,000 x 15)

Rs. 1,20,000

Less : Additional processing cost (10,000 x 3 ) 30,000

Revenues from sale of intermediate product 90,000 1,20,000

Net advantage in further processing

Rs. 30,000

13.8 Operate or Shutdown

Various factors both external and internal affect the functioning of the firm. In such situations it becomes necessary for a firm to temporarily suspend or shutdown the activities of a particular product, department or a unit as a whole.

Illustration 7: A company operating below 50% of its capacity expects that the volume of sales will drop below the present level of 10,000 units per month. Management is concerned that a further drop in sales volume will create a loss and has under consideration a recommendation that operation be suspended, until better market conditions prevail and also a better selling price. The present operation income statement is as follows:

Rs Rs

Sales revenue (10,000 units @ Rs. 3.00)

30,000

Page 280: smu account assignment solved

Less : Variable costs @ Rs. 2.00 per unit 20.000

Fixed costs 10,000

Net Income

0

The following income statements have been prepared for sales at different capacities:

It would appear that shutdown is desirable when the sale volume drops below 6,000 units per month, the point at which operating losses exceed the shutdown cost.

13.9 Exploring New Markets

Decisions regarding entering new markets whether within the country or other the country should be taken after considering the following factors:

· Whether the firm has surplus capacity to meet the new demand?

· What price is being offered by the new market?

· Whether the sale of goods in the new market will affect the present market for the goods?

Illustration 8: The following figures are obtained from the budget of a company which is at present working at 90% capacity and producing 13,000 units per annum.

90%

Rs.

100%

Rs.

Sales 15,00,000 16,00,000

Fixed Expenses 3,00,500 3,00,600

Semi- Fixed Expenses 97,500 1,00,500

Variable Overhead Expenses 1,45,000 1,49,500

Page 281: smu account assignment solved

Units made 13,500 15,000

Labour and material costs per unit are constant under present conditions. Profit margin is 10 per cent.

a) You are required to determine the differential cost of producing 1,500 units by increasing capacity to 100 per cent.

b) What would you recommend for an export price for these 1,500 units taking into account that overseas prices are much lower than indigenous prices?

Solution

Basic Calculation: Rs.

Sales at 90% capacity 15,00,000

Less: Profit 10% 1,50,000

Cost of Goods sold 13,50,000

Less : Expenses (Fixed, semi-variable and variable) 5,43,000

Cost of Material and Labour 8,07,000

Labour and Material at 100% capacity = Rs. 8,07,000 x 100/90

= 8,96,667

Differential cost analysis can now be done as follows:

Capacity levels 90% 100% Different cost

Production (Units) 13,500 15,000 1,500

Material and Labour 8,07,000 8,96,667 89,667

Variable overhead expenses 1,45,000 1,49,500 4,500

Page 282: smu account assignment solved

Semi-variable expenses 97,500 1,00,500 3,000

Fixed expenses 3,00,500 3,00,600 100

13,50,000 14,47,267 97,267

a) Different Cost = Rs. 97,267 (Rs. 14,47,267 – 13,50,000)

b) Minimum price for export = = Rs. 64.84 per unit

At this price, there is no addition to revenue; any price above Rs. 64.84 per unit may be acceptable.

Note: It has been presumed that

i) No capital investment is necessary

ii) No export charges are incurred and

iii) The export price will have no effect on the home market where the product will continue to be sold at the old price. It has also been assumed that necessary precaution have been taken to ensure that the product is not ‘dumped back’.

13.10 Maintaining a Desired level of profit

When deciding between alternative courses of actions the criterion should be to select the project which yields the greatest contribution.

Illustration 9: A company is considering expansion. Fixed costs amount to Rs. 4, 20,000 and are expected to increase by Rs. 1, 25,000 when plant expansion is completed. The present plant capacity is 80,000 units a year. Capacity will increase by 50 per cent with the expansion. Variable costs are currently Rs. 6.80 per unit and are expected to go down by Rs. 0.40 per unit with the expansion. The current selling price is Rs. 16 per unit and is expected to remain same under either alternative. What are the break- even points under either alternative? Which alternative is better and why?

Solution

Page 283: smu account assignment solved

The profitability after expansion is very good and hence it is better to expand.

Illustration 10: Disposal of inventories

ABC Ltd has on hand 5,000 units of a product that cannot be sold through regular sales. These were produced at a total cost of Re. 1, 50,000 and would normally have been sold for Rs. 40 per unit. Three alternatives are being considered.

i. Sell the items as scrap for Rs. 2 per unit

ii. Repackage at a cost of Rs. 20,000 and sell them at Rs. 8 per unit

iii. Dispose them off at the city dump at removal cost of Rs. 500.

Which alternative should be accepted?

Solution

Exhibits the decision analysis

Alternative II should be accepted.

13.11 Summary

· Decision making is the process of evaluating two or more alternatives leading to a final choice known as alternative choice decisions. Decision making is closely associated with planning for the future and is directed towards a specific objective or goal.

· A decision involves selecting among various choices. Non routine types of decisions are crucial and critical to the firm as it involves huge investments and involve much uncertainty. Short term decision making is based on relevant data obtained from accounting information.

Page 284: smu account assignment solved

· Relevant Cost are costs which would change as a result of the decision.

· Opportunity costs are monetary benefits foregone for not pursuing the alternative course. When a decision to follow one course of action is made, the opportunity to pursue some other course is foregone.

· Sunk costs are historical cost that cannot be recovered in a given situation. These costs are irrelevant in decision making.

· Avoidable costs are costs that can be avoided in future as a result of managerial choice. It is also known as discretionary costs. These costs are relevant in decision making.

· Incremental / Differential costs are costs that include variable costs and additional fixed costs resulting from a particular decision. They are helpful in finding out the profitability of increased output and give a better measure than the average cost.

13.12 Terminal Questions

1. Avon garments Ltd manufactures readymade garments and uses its cut-pieces of cloth to manufacture dolls. The following statement of cost has been prepared.

Particulars Readymade garments

Dolls Total

Direct material Rs. 80,000 Rs. 6,000 Rs. 86,000

Direct labour 13,000 1,200 14,200

Variable overheads 17,000 2,800 19,800

Fixed overheads 24,000 3,000 27,000

Total cost 1,34,000 13,000 1,47,000

Sales 1,70,000 12,000 1,82,000

Profit (loss) 36,000 (1,000) 35,000

The cut-pieces used in dolls have a scrap value of Rs 1,000 if sold in the market. As there is a loss of Rs. 1,000 in the manufacturing of dolls, it is suggested to discontinue their manufacture. Advise the management.

Page 285: smu account assignment solved

2. The ABC Company Ltd produces most of its own parts and components. The standard wage rate in the parts department is Rs. 3 per hour. Variable manufacturing overheads is applied at a standard rate of Rs. 2 per labour – hour and fixed manufacturing overheads are charged at a standard rate of Rs 2.50 per hour.

For its current year’s output, the company will require a new part. This part can be made in the parts department without any expansion of existing facilities. Nevertheless, it would be necessary to increase the cost of product testing and inspection by Rs. 5,000 per month. Estimated labour time for the new part is half an hour per unit. Raw materials cost has been estimated at Rs. 6 per unit.

The alternative choice before the company is to purchase part from an outside supplier at Rs 9 per unit. The company has estimated that it will need 2,00,000 new parts during the current years.

Advise the company whether it would be more economical to buy or make the new parts. Would your answer be different if the requirement of new parts was only 1,00,000 parts?

13.13 Answers to SAQ and TQs

Answer to SAQ

1. Change

2 Sunk cost

3. Monetary benefits foregone

4. Avoidable cost

Answers to TQs:

1. Discontinue manufacture of dolls

Readymade garments Dolls Total

Total cost 134000 13000 147000

Profit (loss) 36000 (1000) 35000

2. Decision analysis : 200000 units – The company is advised to make the new part. The differential costs favouring the decision of making the component is Rs40000

Page 286: smu account assignment solved

Decision analysis : 100000 units – The company is advised to buy from an outside supplier. Total cost to manufacture 100000 units is Rs.9,10,000.

Copyright © 2009 SMU

MB0041-Unit-14-Budgetary Control

Unit-14-Budgetary Control

Structure:

14.1 Introduction

Objectives

14.2 Meaning of a Budget

14.3 Budgetary control

14.4 Objectives of budgetary control

14.5 Merits of budgetary control

14.6 Essential features of Budgetary Control

14.7 Steps in budgetary Control

14.8 Types of Budgets

14.9 Cast Budget

14.10 Flexible Budget

14.11 Limitation of Budget Control

14.12 Summary

14.13 Terminal Questions

14.14 Answers to SAQ’s and TQ’s

14.1 Introduction

In a competitive environment, the effective operation of a concern resulting into the excess of income over expenditure fully depends upon “as to what extent the management follower proper

Page 287: smu account assignment solved

planning, effective coordination and dynamic control“. For all these aspects, it has become necessary that management should plan for the future financial and physical requirements. These are the basic criteria that a firm has to adopt to maintain its profitability and productivity. The procedure for preparing plan in respect of future financial and physical requirements is generally called “Budgeting”. It is a forward planning exercise. It involves the preparation in advance of the quantitative as well as the financial statements to indicate the intention of the management in respect of the various aspects of the business. In a broader sense, it is essentially an economic service. Budgeting requires a deeper understanding of the economic system of the environment in which the business concern operates.

Objectives:

After studying this unit, you should be able to:

1. Explain the meaning of budget and budgetary control.

2. Analyze the merits, demerits, essential features of budgetary control.

3. Note the steps involved in the preparation of budgets.

4. Acquaint with various types of budgets.

5. Prepare cash and flexible budgets.

14.2 Meaning of a Budget

Cost and Management Accountants, England has defined a budget as ‘ a numerical statement expressing the plans, policies and goals of an enterprise for a definite period in the future’. Budgets are not actual but are estimated. It is therefore a financial and / or quantitative statement prepared and approved prior to a definite period of time, of the policy to be pursued during that period for the purpose of attaining a given objective.

14.3 Budgetary Control

It is applied to a system of management accounting control by which all operations and output are forecasted far ahead as possible and actual results when known are compared with the budget estimates.

14.4 Objectives

Budgeting is a forward planning. It basically serves as a tool for management control. The objectives of budgeting may be taken as:

· To forecast and plan for future to avoid losses and to maximize profits.

· To help the concern in planning the activities both physical and financial.

Page 288: smu account assignment solved

· To bring about coordination between different functions of the enterprise.

· To control actual actions by ensuring that actual are in tune with targets.

Budgeting and Planning: The planning normally deals with long term and short goals and operations. The goals can be for the entire organization or department-wise or group wise or segment wise to achieve the maximum results and operational efficiency. After setting up objectives in terms of plans, it becomes imperative to organize the factors of production to convert into a reality and workable preposition. In budgeting, planning refers to the preparation of budgets in respect of sales, advertisement, production, inventory, materials cost and requirements, labor cost and requirements, expenses, research, capital expenditures, financial plans. Planning through budgets brings together all segments of the concern in a cooperative way and they are compelled to think seriously about the planning. The views get enlarged than getting into contraction. Internal refinement, broad indexation of activities, concentrated details is the essential features in planning. All the staff must be involved in the planning function to make it more successful and purposeful.

Budgeting and Coordination: It deals with the combined efforts of all the people involved from the shop floor to the top management. Individual and collective wisdom should be considered in the preparation of budgets at all levels to make it a workable document for translation into reality. For this adequate communication at all levels should be established. It is very important that each member of management is having perfect and clear cut knowledge. There must be continuity to coordination. Budget may help us to evaluate and examine whether the members of the management are working in a cooperative way or not.

Budgeting and control: When one relates control function to budget, we find a system what is generally termed as budgetary control. Control signifies such systematic efforts which help the management to know whether actual performance is in line with predetermined goal, policy and plans. It is basically a measurement tool. Yardsticks should be laid down. Standards must be set up.

Therefore, the objectives can be summarized as follows:

· To conform to good business practice by planning for the future.

· To coordinate the various divisions of a business.

· To establish divisional and departmental responsibilities.

· To forecast operating activities and financial position.

· To operate most efficiently the divisions, departments and cost center.

· To avoid waste, to reduce expenses and to obtain the income desired.

· To obtain more economical use of capital available for the efficient operation.

Page 289: smu account assignment solved

· To provide more definite assurance of earning the proper return on capital employed.

· To centralize management control.

· To show the management where action is needed to remedy a situation.

· To help in controlling cash.

· To help in obtaining better inventory control and turnover.

Self Assessment Questions:

1. Budgets are not actual but ______.

2. After setting up objectives in terms of plans, it becomes imperative to organize the factors of production to convert into a ____________and ______________

3. _______signifies such systematic efforts which help the management to know whether actual performance is in line with predetermined goal, policy and plans.

4. Internal refinement, broad indexation of activities, concentrated details is the essential features in _______.

14.5 Merits

In order to help in planning, coordinating and control, budgets need to be prepared for every organization to get the maximum benefit. Broadly, the merits are as follows:

1. It forces basic policies to initiatives

2. The budgetary control aims at the maximization of profits

3. Budgets fix the goals and targets without which operations lack direction

4. Reduction in cost and elimination of inefficiencies

5. Budgetary control facilitates to make ordered effort and brings about overall efficiency in results.

6. Budgetary control ensures that the capital employed at a particular level is kept at a minimum level

7. Budgetary control enables the management to decentralize responsibility without losing control

Page 290: smu account assignment solved

8. It is a good guide to the management for making future plans. Based on budgetary control realistic budgets can be drawn.

9. Budgetary control facilitates an intelligent and planned forecast of the future

10. Budgetary control acts as a safety signal for the management. It prevents all types of wastages.

11. Budgetary control brings to light the inefficiencies and weakness on comparing actual performance with budget. Management can take timely remedial measures.

12. Financial crisis can be avoided since budget provides advance information.

13. It is a guide to the management in the field of research and development in future.

14.6 Essential Features of Budgetary Control

An effective budgeting system should have essential features to get best results. In this direction, the following may be considered as essential features of an effective budgeting.

Business Policies defined: The top management of an organization strives to have an action plan for every activity and for each department. Every budget should reflect the business policies formulated from time to time. The policies should be precise and the same must be clearly defined. No ambiguity should enter the document. Clear knowledge should be provided to all the personnel concerned who are going to execute the policies. Periodic suggestions should be called for.

Forecasting: Business forecasts are the foundation of budgets. Time and again discussions should be arranged to derive the most profitable combinations of forecasts. Better results can be anticipated based on the sound forecasts. As far as possible, quantitative techniques should be made use of while forecasting

Formation of Budget Committee: A budget committee is a group of representatives of various important departments in an organization. The functions of committee should be specified clearly. The committee plays a vital role in the preparation and execution of budget estimated. It brings coordination among other departments. It aids in the finalization of policies and programs. Non-financial activities are also considered to make it a wholesome affair.

Accounting System: To make the budget a successful document, there should be proper flow of accurate and timely information. The accounting adopted by the organization should be proper and must be fine-tuned from time to time

Organizational efficiency: To make the budget preparation and its subsequent implementation a success, an efficient, adequate and best organization is necessary a budgeting system should always be supported by a sound organizational structure. There must be a clear cut demarcation

Page 291: smu account assignment solved

of lines of authority and responsibility. There must also be a delegation of authority from top to bottom line.

Management Philosophy: Every management should set a healthy philosophy while opting for the budget. Management must wholeheartedly support the activities which developing a budget. Encouragement should flow from top management. All the members must be involved to make it a workable preposition and a dream-driven document.

Reporting system: Proper feedback system should be established. Provision should be made for corrective measures whenever comparative measures are proposed.

Availability of statistical information: Since budgets are always prepared and expressed in quantitative terms, it is essential that sufficient and accurate relevant data should be made available to each department.

Motivation: Since budget acts as a mirror, the entire organization should become smart in its approach. Every employees both executive and non-executives should be made part of the overall exercise. Employees should be persuaded than pressurized to appreciate the benefits of the budgets so that the fruits can be shared by all the members of the organization.

Self Assessment Questions:

5. Budgetary control acts as a ________ for the management. It prevents wastages of all types

6. Business forecasts are the foundation of ________

7. _______ must wholeheartedly support the activities which developing a budget.

14.7 Steps in Budgetary Control

The procedure to be followed in the preparation and control of budget may differ from business to business. But, a general pattern of outline of budget preparation and control may go a long way to achieve the end results. The steps are as follows:

Formulation of policies: The business policies are the foundation stone of budget construction. Function policies should be formulated in advance. Long-range policies with short term projections should be made for the functional areas such as sales, production, inventory, cash management, capital expenditure.

Preparation of forecasts: Based on the formulated policies, forecast should be made in respect of each function. Activity based concepts should be introduced at the micro level for each function Forecasts should not be considered as a mere estimates. Scientific methods should be adopted for forecasting. Analysis of various factors based on past, and present, future forecast should be made.

Page 292: smu account assignment solved

Preparation of budgets: Forecasts are converted into written codified document. Such written documents can be used for coordination purposes. Function budgets will act as guidelines for implementation.

Forecast combinations: While developing the budgets, through a Master Budget various permutations and combination processes are considered and developed. Based on this, establishment of the most preferred one which will yield optimum benefits should be considered. All the factor components should be identified which are likely to cause disturbances while implementing the budgets

14.8 Types of Budgets

The budgets are normally classified according to their nature. They are: (a) fixed budget. (b) Flexible Budget. (c) Functional Budget

Fixed Budget: It is also known as static budgets. It is prepared for a fixed or standard volume of activity. They do not change with change in the volume of activity. They are prepared well in advance Due to this, there are bound to be variances at the time of comparison. Hence, the budget targets become unsuitable for the purpose of comparison. Wide deviations are noticed due to changes in the volume of activity.

Flexible Budget: It is prepared with a view to take into account the periodic changes in the level of activity attained. In this case, the revenues and costs targets are set in respect of different levels of activity say from zero to 100 % of the production volume. Such mechanism helps to change revenues and cost targets for the actual level of activity and thus makes the comparison more logical and scientific.

Functional Budget: These are also known as subsidiary budgets. These are prepared on the basis of approved forecasts for individual department. Since departments are created based on the functions, they are known as functional budgets. The functional budgets may vary in number from business to business. The functional budgets include sales budget, Production budget, selling and distribution overhead budget, plant budget, research and development budget, overheads budget, financial budget such as cash budget and capital expenditure budget.

Self Assessment Questions:

8. ______ is also known as static budget because it is prepared for a fixed or standard volume of activity.

9. Types of budgets are _____________.

10. In _______ budget the revenues and costs targets are set in respect of different levels of activity say from zero to hundred percent of the production volume.

14.9 Cash Budget

Page 293: smu account assignment solved

A proper control over cash is very essential. Cash is an important component in any activity. The control becomes inescapable. If cash is not properly managed or if it is mismanaged, the ultimate result would be disastrous. In many times and in many business situations, business failures are noticed due to the lacunae found in the cash management. Hence cash budgeting occupies a pivotal place in the study of Financial Management.

Cash budgeting is the process of forecasting the expected receipts known as cash inflows, and expected payments known as cash outflows to meet the future obligations. The written statement of receipts and payments is known as the cash budget. It is a crystal ball which enables one to observe the future movements in cash position. It is a mere forecast of cash position of an undertaking for a definite period of time. The period may be daily, weekly, monthly, quarterly, semi-annually, or annually. The major two components of cash budget would be forecast first the cash receipts and then second forecasting the cash disbursements.

The receipts of cash are formatted as follows:

1. Opening balance of cash in hand and cash at bank

2. Cash sales

3. Collection from debtors to whom sales are effected on credit basis

4. College from Bills received

5. Interest and advances and loans granted

6. Dividends received from investments

7. Sale proceeds from capital assets

8. Proceeds from issue of shares and debentures

9. Other sources.

After determining the various sources, the quantum of receipt should be estimated. Past analysis will help to identify the problem areas for effecting collection of cash.

Illustration 1: A large retail stores makes 25% of its sales for cash and the balance on 30 days net. Due to faulty collection practice, there have been losses from bad debts to the extent of 1 % of credit sales on average in the past. The experience of the store tells that normally 60 % of credit sales are collected in the month following the sale, 25% in the second following month and 14 % in the third following month. Sales in the preceding three months have been January 2007 Rs.80,000, February Rs.1,00,000 and March Rs.1,40,000. Sales for the next three months are estimated as April Rs.1,50,000, May Rs.1,10,000 and June Rs.1,00,000. Prepare a schedule of projected cash collection.

Page 294: smu account assignment solved

Solution:

Forecasts of cash payments: The items of expenditures differ from business to business. The normal items which come under the lists are:

1. Cash purchases

2. Payment to creditors or suppliers

3. Payments to Bills payable

4. Payment to employees in the nature of wages, salaries

5. Manufacturing, selling and distribution and administration expenses

6. Repayments of bank load and special obligations such as bonus, donations, advances

7. Interest and dividend payments

8. Capital expenditures for acquiring assets of enduring benefit

9. payment of tax liability

10. other expenses of periodic nature

The quantum of amount likely to be spend on the above each item is generally determined with reference to functional budgets of the concerns. The policy of the management will also play a crucial role. It is the policy which determines the ratio of cash purchases and credit purchases. In many cases, the time lag affects the amount of expenditures to be incurred in a particular period. The formula adopted for the expenses payable in next month is : month’s amount x time lag

Illustration 2:

Page 295: smu account assignment solved

The following are the forecasts relating to wages and factory expenses.

July Aug Sept Oct Nov

Wages 32,000 32,000 32,000 40,000 32,000

Factory expenses 5,000 5,000 5,000 5,000 5,000

One eighth of wages, half of factory expenses are paid in the succeeding month. Estimate the amount of wages and factory expenses payable in September, October and November.

Solution

Statement showing the disbursements of cash

Particulars Sept Oct Nov

Wages: Aug 32,000 4,000 - -

Sept 32,000 28,000 4,000 -

Oct 40,000 - 35,000 5,000

Nov 32,000 - - 28,000

32,000 39,000 33,000

Factory expenses

Aug 5,000 2,500 - -

Sept 5,000 2,500 2,500 -

Oct 5,000 - 2,500 2,500

Nov 5,000 - - 2,500

5,000 5,000 5,000

Illustration 3:

Page 296: smu account assignment solved

The following information is provided in respect of Rashmi Ltd. Prepare a Cash Budget for April, May and June 2007.

Months Details Sales Purchases Wages Expenses

Jan Actual 80,000 45,000 20,000 5,000

Feb Actual 80,000 40,000 18,000 6,000

March Actual 75,000 42,000 22,000 6,000

April Budget 90,000 50,000 24,000 7,000

May Budget 85,000 45,000 20,000 6,000

June Budget 80,000 35,000 18,000 5,000

Additional information:

a. 10% of the purchases and 20% of sales are in cash

b. The average collection period of the company is 1/2 month and the credit purchases are paid regularly after one month.

c. Wages are paid half monthly and the rent of Rs.500 included in expenses is paid monthly. Other expenses are paid after one month lag.

d. Cash balance on April 1, 2007 may be assumed to be Rs.15,000.

Solution:

Illustration 4:

Page 297: smu account assignment solved

Hindustan Ltd. is to start production on January 1, 2008. The prime cost of a unit is expected to be Rs.40 (Rs.16 per material and Rs.24 for labor). In addition, variable expenses per unit are expected to be Rs.8 and fixed expenses per month Rs.30,000. Payment for materials is to be made in the month following the purchases. One-third of sales will be for cash and the rest on credit for settlement in the following month. Expenses are payable in the month in which they are incurred. The selling price is fixed at Rs.80 per unit. The number of units to be produced and sold are expected to be : January 900, February 1,200, March 1,800, April 2,000, May 2,100 and June 2,400. Draw a cash budget indicating cash requirements.

Solution

Illustration 5:

Ranjini Ltd. intends to approach her Bankers for temporary overdraft facility for three months from 1st June to 31st August, 2007. Prepare a Cash budget for the above period.

Months Sales Purchases Wages

April 3,60,000 2,49,600 24,000

May 3,84,000 2,88,000 28,000

June 2,16,000 4,86,000 22,000

July 3,48,000 4,92,000 20,000

Aug 2,52,000 5,36,000 30,000

(a) The entire sale is on credit basis out of which 50% is realized in succeeding month and balance in the second month following sales.

Page 298: smu account assignment solved

(b) Creditors are paid in the month following purchase.

(c) Estimated cash as on 1st June is Rs.50,000

Solution

Illustration 6:

Prepare a cash budget from January to April.

Expected Purchases Expected Sales

Jan 48,000 60,000

Feb 80,000 40,000

Mar 81,000 45,000

April 90,000 40,000

Wages paid Rs.5,000 per month. Cash balance on 1st January Rs.8,000. Management decides that:

a) In case of deficit upto of Rs.10,000, arrangement can be made with the bank.

b) In case of deficit exceeding Rs.10,000 but within Rs.42,000, debentures to be issued.

c) In case of deficit exceeding Rs.42,000, equity shares to be issued.

Solution

CASH BUDGET

Particulars Jan Feb March April

Page 299: smu account assignment solved

RECEIPTS

Opening balance 8,000 15,000 (30,000) (71,000)

Cash sales 60,000 40,000 45,000 40,000

Total, say A 68,000 55,000 15,000 (31,000)

PAYMENTS

Purchases 48,000 80,000 81,000 90,000

Wages 5,000 5,000 5,000 5,000

Total, say B 53,000 85,000 86,000 95,000

Closing Balance A – B 15,000 (30,000) (71,000) (1,26,000)

The total deficit of Rs.1,26,000 should be raised from the issue of Equity Shares.

14.10 Flexible Budget

According to I.C.M.A., London, a flexible budget is “a budget which is designed to change in accordance with the level of activity actually attained”. The basic idea of a flexible budget is that there shall be some standard of cost and expenditures. Thus, a budget prepared in a manner to give budgeted costs for any level of activity is, known as flexible budget. Such budget is prepared after considering the variable and fixed elements of costs and the changes which may be expected for each item at various levels of operations.

The main focus of flexible budget is to re cognize the difference in behavior pattern of fixed and variable costs in relation to fluctuations in production and sales.

The flexible budget is, hence, designed to change appropriately with such fluctuations. In flexible budget, data relating to costs and expenses may progressively be changed in any month in accordance with actual output achieved. Costs and estimates are made in advance based on standards.

A maximum and a minimum level of operation are made. Comparison of budgeted with actual are made. Budgeted activities are taken as basis.

The principles of flexible budgeting concepts are applied to functional budget, master budgets. Popularly, the flexible budget is adopted for production cost budget. A detailed classification is

Page 300: smu account assignment solved

adopted such as variable, fixed and semi-variables. Adopting micro-level classifications, it is intended to pin-point the various effects on each class of overheads.

Illustration 7:

Draw a flexible budget for the level of operation at 70 %, 80 % and 90 %.

Variable overheads: at 80% capacity.

Indirect labor Rs.12,000. Stores and spares Rs.4,000.

Semi-variable overheads at 80% capacity.

Power (30% fixed) Rs.20,000. Repairs and maintenance at 60% fixed Rs.2,000.

Fixed overheads: at 80%

Depreciation Rs.11,000. Insurance Rs.3,000. Salaries Rs.10,000.

The estimated direct labor hours 1,24,000.

Solution:

Divide the grand total by estimated Labour hours.

14.11 Limitations of Budgeting

The main limitations of budgeting are as under:

Budget plan: Since budget plans are based on estimates, the success or otherwise depend on the accuracy of basic estimates or forecasts. Due to this while making estimates, judgmental decision may accrue. The results need to be interpreted very cautiously.

Page 301: smu account assignment solved

Rigidity: Since the estimates are quantitative expression of all relevant data, there is likely that finality attachment may become very clear. Such consideration may result in rigidity. Rigidity may become a setback for the changing business conditions.

Replacement: Budgeting is not a substitute for management. It is essentially a tool of management. Under no circumstances, it should be concluded that the budgeting is alone sufficient to ensure success and to guarantee future profits.

Costly: The installation of budgeting system to an organization involve too much of costs. Its scientific approach will definitely call for huge cost allocation. Small concerns cannot afford to take over huge costs for the establishment of business systems. Since the costs and revenues and operational activities do not match in many occasions, the entire exercise will become costly. The system should be adopted only when benefits exceed the costs.

14.12 Summary

Budgets are not actual but estimated ones. It is therefore a financial and / or quantitative statement prepared and approved prior to a definite period of time, of the policy to be pursued during that period for the purpose of attaining a given objective.

Budgeting is a forward planning. It basically serves as a tool for management control.

Planning through budgets brings together all segments of the concern in a cooperative way and they are compelled to think seriously about the planning. The views get enlarged than getting into contraction. Internal refinement, broad indexation of activities, concentrated details is the essential features in planning. All the staff must be involved in the planning function to make it more successful and purposeful.

Control signifies such systematic efforts which help the management to know whether actual performance is in line with predetermined goal, policy and plans. It is basically a measurement tool. Yardsticks should be laid down. Standards must be set up.

14.13 Terminal Questions

1. What are the merits of budgets?

2. Describe the essential features of budgetary control.

3. What are the steps in budgetary control?

4. What are the limitations of budgeting?

4.14 Answer Self Assessment Questions

1. EstimatesAnswer for Terminal Questions

Page 302: smu account assignment solved

2. Reality and workable preposition

3. Control

4. Planning

5. Safety signal

6. Budgets

7. Management

8. Fixed budget

9. Fixed , flexible, functional

10. Flexible

1. Refer to unit 14.5

2. Refer to unit 14.6

3. Refer to unit 14.7

4. Refer to unit 14.11

Copyright © 2009 SMU

Powered by Sikkim Manipal University

.

Page 303: smu account assignment solved

MB0041-Unit-15 -Standard Costing

Unit-15 -Standard Costing

Structure

15.1 Introduction

Objectives

15.2 Definition of Standard Costing

15.3 Meaning

15.4 Difference between Standard cost and Budgetary Control

15.5 Establishment of standards

15.6 Variance analysis

15.7 Material cost variance

15.8 Material price variance

15.9 Material usage variance

15.10 Material Mix variance

15.11 Material Yield variance

15.12 Direct labor variance

15.13 Labor Efficiency Variance

15.14 Labor Rate variance

15.15 Labor mix variance

15.16 Labor Yield Variance

15.17 Summary

15.18 Terminal Questions

15.19 Answers to SAQ’s and TQ’s

Page 304: smu account assignment solved

15.1 Introduction

Standard costing is a very important system of cost control. It is a system which seeks to control the cost of each unit or batch through determination before hand of what should be the cost and then its comparison with actual cost. Through planned accounting procedures, the difference between the actual and pre-determined costs are analyzed and then promptly reported upon to managers. Based on this, it is possible to take corrective and preventive action as well as employ the data for planning, coordination and control.

Objectives:

After studying this unit, you should be able to :

1. Define the standard costing.

2. Understand the meaning.

3. Differentiate between standard cost and budgetary control.

4. Acquaint with establishment of standards.

5. Practice the variance analysis.

15.2 Definition of Standard Costing

Standard costing may be defined as a technique of cost accounting which compares the standard cost of each product or service with the actual cost to determine the efficiency of the operation so that any remedial action may be taken immediately: Brown and Howard.

According to J. Batty “standard costing is a system of cost accounting which is designed to show in detail how much each product should cost to produce and sell when a business is operating at a stated level of efficiency and for a given volume of output”.

15.3 Meaning

The meaning of standard costing is focused on the method of financial control. It compares the predetermined and actual costs. It is normally associated closely with budgetary control. Many organizations use both the systems although one can be used without the other. Standard costing is mainly applied to products and processes.

Therefore, it is a technique that is more commonly used in manufacturing organization, though it may also be useful in service industries. As in budgetary control, it allows the comparison of pre-determined costs and income with the actual costs and income achieved. Any difference can then be investigated.

Page 305: smu account assignment solved

15.4 Difference between Standard Cost and Budgetary Control

Both are closely interrelated. They both aim at the improvement of the system of managerial control. They both achieve the same objective of maximum efficiency and cost control by establishing pre-determined standards. They compare actual performance with the predetermined standard. They take necessary steps to improve the situation wherever necessary. Both techniques are forward looking.

However, the following are some of the differences identified.

1. The scope of budgetary control is wider. It is integrated plan of action, a coordinated plan in respect of all functions of an enterprise. The scope of standard costing on the other hand is limited to the operating level. Here too, it is further linked to costs. Budgetary control is extensive whereas standard costing is intensive in its application

2. Budgetary control deals with costs and revenues. But standard costing restricts only with costs.

3. Budgetary control takes into account all activities such as production, sales, purchases, finance, capital expenditure, personnel whereas standard costing is restricted to deal with only costs.

4. Budgetary control targets are based on past actual adjusted to future trends. In standard costing, standards are based on technical assessment.

5. At the approach level, budgeted targets work as the maximum limit of expenses above which the actual expenditure should not normally exceed. Under standard costing, standards are attainable level of performance.

6. Budget is projection of final accounts. Standard costs are projection of only cost accounts.

7. Budgetary control emphasizes the forecasting aspect of the future operations. Standard

8. Costing scope and utility is limited to only operating level of the concern.

9. In budgetary control, the degree of variance analysis tends to be much less and variances are not revealed through the accounts but are revealed in total. But in standard costing, variances are analyzed in details according to their originating causes and are revealed through different accounts.

10. Budgetary control is possible even in parts of expenses according to the attitude of management. A standard costing system can not be operated in parts. All items of expenditure included in cost units are to be accounted for.

Page 306: smu account assignment solved

Self Assessment Questions:

Standard costing is defined as a technique of cost accounting which compares the _____________ of each product or service with the actual cost .

Standard cost focuses on _________.

Standard cost and budget control _________.

15.5 Establishment of Standards

Under standard costing system, there is a need to determine the standard costs for each element of cost. The standards are fixed for three main elements of cost namely direct material, direct labor and overhead.

Standards should be fixed for each of them separately.

Direct Material: Standard material cost for each product should be pre-determined. This will require the determination of material quantity standard and material price standard. The standard quantity of each type of materials is determined by the engineering department on the basis of past records, experience and chemical and engineering tests.

While setting such standards, an allowance should be made for the normal wastage of materials. The standard price for each item of material is established after carefully studying the market conditions and forecasting the trend of prices for a future period. This is done by cost accountant with the help of purchase officer.

Direct labor: The standard labor time and standard labor rate should be established. Standard time for each grade of labor is fixed by the production engineering department on the basis of time and motion study. In fixing the standard time due allowance should be made for fatigue, tool setting, receiving instructions and normal idle time. The standard rates of pay for each category of labor are fixed by the cost accountant with the help of personnel department.

Overheads: These are aggregate of indirect materials, indirect labor and indirect expenses. Separate standards must be established for variable and fixed overheads. As variable overheads per unit or per hour remain constant at each level of output / sales but total amount of variable overheads tend to vary directly with volume of output / sales.

Therefore, it is sufficient to calculate only a standard variable overhead rate per unit or per hour. This is done by dividing the total variable overheads for the budget period by the budgeted output. In respect of fixed overheads standards are set for total fixed overheads for the budget period and the budgeted output and standard fixed overhead rate is computed by dividing the budgeted fixed overheads with budgeted output.

15.6 Cost Variance Analysis

Page 307: smu account assignment solved

The distinctive feature of standard costing system is variance analysis. By definition, the term “variance” means the variation or deviation of the actual from the standard. In standard costing, it implies the difference between the actual cost and standard cost. Variances indicate the extent to which standards set have been achieved. If properly recorded and analyzed, these variances become very important and useful tool for managerial control.

Variances by themselves are not the end. They are computed to know the reasons and fix the responsibility for any deviations of actual performances from pre determined targets. Based on this corrective measures are proposed for adoption in future. Therefore, variance analysis is the process of analyzing variances by sub-dividing the total variance in such a way that management can assign responsibility for off standard performance It is hence a very useful means for interpreting operating results and spotting situations calling for correction.

Variances are interpreted as favorable and unfavorable variances. Each variance is interpreted. Interpretation helps in deciding whether a variance is favorable or unfavorable. When the actual cost is less than the standard cost, the difference is termed as “favorable” or “credit” variance. On the other hand, when actual cost exceeds the standard cost, the difference is termed as “unfavorable”, “adverse” or “debit” variance.

Ordinarily, a favorable variance is a sign of efficiency of the organization whereas an unfavorable variance a sign of inefficiency. But in variance analysis, this general logic may prove to be untrue. Therefore, all variances should be interpreted in relation to each other and only the net result be reported to the management for corrective action.

Controllable and Uncontrollable variances: The controllable variance can be identified as the primary responsibility of a specified person or a department. The variance is due to the factors beyond the control of the concerned person or department, it is said to be uncontrollable. No person or department can be held responsible for uncontrollable variances. Actually revision of standards is required to remove such variances in future.

Self Assessment Questions:

Standards are established for _________, __________ and _______________.

Variation refers to _____________.

When the actual cost is less than the standard cost, the difference is termed as ____________ or “credit” variance

Variances are interpreted as __________ and _____________.

15.7 Material Cost Variance

It is the difference between the standard cost of materials allowed for the actual output and the actual cost of materials used. It may be expressed as:

Page 308: smu account assignment solved

Or standard quantity of material for actual output x standard price per unit of material.

A favorable variance would result if actual cost is less than the standard cost and vice versa. The material cost variance is the sum total of material price variance and material usage variance.

Illustration 1: Bombay Dyeing Ltd. has decided to extend its range to include Denim Jackets. One jacket requires a standard usage of 3 meters of direct material which has been set at a standard price of Rs.2.20 per meter. In the period, 80 jackets were made and 260 meters of material consumed at a cost of Rs.1.95 per meter. Calculate the direct materials total variance.

Solution: Calculate the standard quantity of materials for the actual level of production

The difference indicates that them company has spent less on materials than planned for the level of production.

15.8 Material Price Variance

Under Material price variance, the price paid for materials is different from the pre-determined price. It is calculated by multiplying the actual quantity of materials used with the difference between standard and actual prices. The formula is :

A favorable variance would result if the actual price is less than the standard price and vice versa.

Illustration 2: Calculate the direct material price variance from the data of Bombay Dyeing Ltd above.

Solution:

It is favorable because the company has paid less for the materials than planned for that level of production

Page 309: smu account assignment solved

15.9 Material Usage Variance

It is also known as material quantity variance or efficiency variance. It is that portion of material cost variance which measures the difference in material cost arising from higher or less a consumption of materials than the standard material consumption for the actual output. It is calculated by multiplying the standard price with the difference between the standard and actual quantitative of materials:

A favorable variance would result if the actual quantity is less than the standard quantity and vice versa.

Self Assessment Questions:

The formula for Material Cost variance is ______________.

The formula for Material price variance is __________.

The formula for Material usage variance is _______.

Illustration 3: Calculate the direct material usage variance from the data of Bombay Dyeing Ltd above.

MUV = (SQ – AQ) SP

= (240 – 260 meters) x Rs. 2.20 per unit

= Rs. 44 (ADV)

It is adverse because the company has used more materials than planned for that level of production.

Illustration 4: It is observed that one unit of product X requires 3 kgs of material M at Rs.2 per kg. During January 2008, 200 units of product X were produced consuming 620 kgs of material M, all of which was purchased at Rs.1.80 per kg. Compute material cost variances.

Solution:

Page 310: smu account assignment solved

Illustration 5: For producing a commodity, the standard quantity of material was fixed 10 kgs and standard price was fixed at Rs.2 per kg. The actual quantity was consumed 12 kgs and the actual price was Rs.1.90 per kg. Calculate the material variances.

Solution:

Illustration 6: Calculate the material variance.

Standard Actual

Material for 80 kgs Output 1,65,000 kgs

Finished products 100 kgs Material used 2,00,000 kgs

Price per kg Rs.0.80 paid Actual cost Rs.1,70,000

Solution: Calculation of standard quantity

Illustration 7:

It is estimated that in the manufacture of a product, for each ton of materials consumed 100 units should be produced. The standard price per ton of materials is Rs. 10. During the first week of January, 100 tons of materials were issued to the Production Department. The purchase price of which was Rs. 10.50 per ton. The actual output for the period was 10,250 units. Calculate the cost variances.

Page 311: smu account assignment solved

Solution:

Illustration 8: A factory works on standard costing system. The standard estimates of material for the manufacture of 1000 units of a commodity are 400 kg at Rs. 2.50 per kg. When 2000 units of a commodity are manufactured, it is found that 820 kgs of material is consumed at Rs. 2.60 per kg. Calculate the material variance

Solution: First calculate the standard quantity and standard cost.

15.10 Material Mix Variance

This variance arises only when more than one type of materials are used in manufacturing the product and the quantities of materials issued to production are not in proportion of standard mix. It is defined as that portion of the direct materials usage variance which is due to difference between the standard and actual, composition of a mixture. For calculating the mix variance, first calculate the quantities of revised standard mix. This is calculated by dividing the total quantities of actual mix in standard mix proportion.

In the terminology of standard costing, quantities of revised standard mix are referred to as “revised standard quantity”. Mix variance is obtained by multiplying the standard price of materials with the difference between revised standard quantity and actual quantity for each material. It may be expressed as follows:

Material Mix Variance = Revised standard quantity for each material – actual MMV Quantity for each material) x standard price.

Where RSQ = standard quantity for each material / total of standard quantity of all types of materials x actual mix total

RSQ = Total weight of actual mix / total weight of standard mix (x) standard quantity.

Page 312: smu account assignment solved

A favorable variance would result if actual quantity is less than revised standard quantity and vice versa.

Illustration 9: The following extracts are extracted from the books of DR Ltd.

Standard Mix Actual Mix

Material Qty Rate Total Qty Rate Total

X 300 5 1500 280 5 1400

Y 200 10 2000 220 10 2200

Total 500 500

Calculate the material mix variance

Solution:

Revised standard quantity = Total weight of actual mix / total weight of standard mix x standard quantity

15.11 Material Yield Variance

This variance arises only when the rate of output is known. It is that portion of the direct material usage variance which is due to the difference between standard yield specified and actual yield obtained. It measures the loss or saving due to wastage of materials. This variance is calculated as follows:

where standard rate = standard cost of standard mix / standard output from standard mix standard yield = standard output from standard mix / standard mix total x actual mix total MYV is an output variance and hence a favorable variance would result if actual yield is more than standard yield and vice versa.

Self Assessment Questions:

Page 313: smu account assignment solved

The formula for Material mix variance is __________.

The formula for Material yield variance is __________.

Illustration 10: DR manufactures a product X. It is estimated that for each ton of material consumed, 100 articles should be produced. The standard price per ton of material is Rs. 10. During the first week of January 2008, 100 tons were issued to production, the price of which was Rs.10.50 per ton. Production during the week was 10,200 articles. Compute the variances

Solution:

Illustration 11 : The standard mix of product MS is as follows

Materials Qty in Kg Price/kg

A 50 5

B 20 4

C 30 10

The standard loss in production is 10 % of input. There is no scrap value. Actual production for a month was 7,240 kgs of MS from 80 mixes. Actual purchases and consumption of materials are:

Materials Qty in Kg Price/kg

A 4160 5.50

B 1680 3.75

C 2560 9.50

Page 314: smu account assignment solved

Solution

Statement showing standard input requirements of 80 mixes of product MS

Material

Standard

Actual

SQ SR SC AQ AR AC

A 4,000 5 20,000 4,160 5.50 22,800

B 1,600 4 6,400 1,680 3.75 6,300

C 2,400 10 24,000 2,560 9.50 24,320

Total 8,000 50,400 8,400 53,500

Less std.loss 800

Final output 7,200 50,400

15.12 Direct Labour Variances

The same principles apply to the calculation of Direct Labor variances as for the direct material variances. Standards are established for the rate of pay to be paid for the production of particular products and labor time taken for their production. The standard time taken is expressed in standard hours or minutes and become the measure of output. By comparing the standard hours allowed and the actual time taken, labor efficiency can be assessed. In practice, standard times are established by work, time and method study techniques.

Direct Labor Variance: It is the difference between actual labor cost and the standard labor cost of production achieved. It is calculated as :

Page 315: smu account assignment solved

Illustration 12: The management of DR Ltd decides that it takes 6 standard hours to make one Denim jacket and the standard rate paid to labor is Rs. 8 per hour. The actual production is 900 units and this took 5,100 hours at a rate of Rs.8.30 per hour. Calculate the direct labor total variance.

Solution: Calculate the standard labor hour for 900 jackets.

For one Jacket production, the standard hour is 6.

Therefore, for producing 900 units, the standard hour is 900 x 6/1 = 5,400 hours.

DLV = (5,400 x – (5,100 x 8.30) = Rs. 870 favorable.

A favorable variance would result when actual cost is less than standard cost and vice versa. Labor cost variance is the sum total of labor rate variance, labor efficiency variance, rate variance, idle time and labor calendar variance

15.13 Labour Efficiency Variance

It is that portion of labor cost variance which is due to the difference between the standard labs or hours specified for the activity i.e. output achieved and the actual labor hours worked. It is calculated by multiplying standard rate of wages with the difference between standard hours and actual hours worked.

LEV = Standard hours – actual hours worked) x standard rate

Shorten = (SH – AH ) SR

A favorable variance would result when actual hours worked are less than standard hours and vice versa.

Illustration 14: From the data above, calculate the labor efficiency variance;

Solution: (5400 standard hours – 5100 actual hours) x Rs. 8 standard rate

Rs. 2,400 FAV

15.14 Labour Rate Variance

It is that portion of labor cost variance which is due to the difference between the standard rate specified and actual rate paid. It is calculated by multiplying the actual hours paid with the difference between standard rate specified and actual rate paid.

Page 316: smu account assignment solved

Labor Rate variance = (Standard Rate – Actual Rate) x actual hours paid.

Shorten = (SR – AR) AH

Self Assessment Questions 5:

The formula for Direct labor variance is ___________.

The formula for Labor efficiency variance to _________________.

The formula for Labor rate variance is __________.

Illustration 15: Citing DR example, calculate the direct labor rate variance

Solution:

llustration 16: The production of a certain unit is assumed to require 18 hours labor at a rate of Rs. 1.25 per hour. On completion of a unit, it was found that the time taken was 16 hours, the wage rate being Rs. 1.50 per hour. Calculate labor variances.

Solution:

Working:

Labor Idle Time Variance: It is that portion of labor cost variance which is due to abnormal idle time of workers. This variance is calculated to show separately the effect of abnormal causes affecting production such as failure of power supplies, machine break down, waiting for materials, waiting for instructions, strike, lock-outs. It is calculated as:

Labor idle time variance = Idle hours x standard hourly rate

This variance is always an adverse one.

Page 317: smu account assignment solved

Illustration 17: In the ma manufacture of a product, 200 employees are engaged at a rate of 50 paise per hour. A five day week of 40 hours is worked and the standard performance is set at 250 units per hour. During the first week in January, six employee were paid at 45 paise an hour and four at 56 paise an hour, the remaining employees were paid at standard rates. The factory stopped production for one hour due to power failure. Calculate variances.

Solution:

15.15 Labour Mix Variance

This variance arises only when different types of workers (women and men workers, trained, semi-trained and untrained workers, are employed in manufacturing. If actual working force of different grades of workers is not in the pre-determined ratio, then the mix variance will occur. The variance shows to the management as to how much of the labor cost variance is due to the changes in the composition of labor force. It is calculated as follows:

LMV = (Revised standard hours – actual hours worked) x standard hourly rate Shorten (RSLH – ALH) x SR

Where revised standard hour = total time of actual worker / total time of standard workers x standard labor rate.

Illustration 18: The labor budget for a week is as follows:

40 skilled men at Rs.1.50 per hour for 80 hours

80 unskilled men at Re.1 per hour for 80 hours

Actual labor force was used are given below;

60 skilled men at Rs.1.50 per hour for 80 hours

60 unskilled men at Re.1 per hour for 80 hours

Calculate labor mix variance.

Page 318: smu account assignment solved

Solution:

15.16 Labour Yield Variance

This is due to the difference in the standard output specified and the actual output obtained. The formula is as follows:

LYV = (Actual output – Standard output) x standard cost per unit

Illustration 19: Actual output 460 units. Standard output 500 units. Standard rate of wages is Rs.9 per hour. The Standard time is 2 hour per unit.

Solution:

Illustration 20: Calculate (a) Labor rate variance (b) labor efficiency variance (c) labor cost variance

Standard: Labor rate 0.24 paise per hour. Labor hours 3 per unit.

Actual: Units produced 250. Labor rate 0.25 paise per hour. Hours worked 800.

Solution:

15.17 Summary

Standard costing is a system of cost accounting which is designed to show in detail how much each product should cost to produce and sell when a business is operating at a stated level of efficiency and for a given volume of output

Budgetary control takes into account all activities such as production, sales, purchases, finance, capital expenditure, personnel whereas standard costing is restricted to deal with only costs.

Page 319: smu account assignment solved

The term “variance” means the variation or deviation of the actual from the standard. In standard costing, it implies the difference between the actual cost and standard cost.

Under standard costing system, there is a need to determine the standard costs for each element of cost. The standards are fixed for three main elements of cost namely direct material, direct labor and overhead.

15.18 Terminal Questions

1. How is standard costing related to budgetary control?

2. How do you fix standard for direct material, direct labor and direct overheads?

3. Write short note on :

a) Material Price Variance

b) Material Mix Variance

c) Material Yield Variance.

4. Briefly describe labor mix variance and yield variance.

5. Compute price, usage, cost and mix variance

Material

Standard

Actual

Quantity Price Total Qty Price Total

A 6 1.50 9 5 2.40 12

B 2 3.5 7 1 6 6

6. Data given below pertain to DR Ltd.

DEPARTMENT

A B

Actual gross wages 2,000 1,800

Page 320: smu account assignment solved

Standard hours produced 8,000 6,000

Standard rate per hour 0.30 0.35

Actual hours worked 8,000 5,800

Calculate labor variances

15.19 Answer to SAQ’s and TQ’s

Standard cost

Financial control

Closely interrelated

Direct martial, direct labor, overheads

Deviation

Favourable

Favorable and adverse

8. SC – AC

9. (SP – AP) x AQ

10. SQ – AQ x SP

11. RSQ – AQ x SP

12. SY – AY x SR

13. SC-AC

14. SH – AH x SR

15. SR – AR x AH

Terminal Questions

1. Refer to unit 15.4

2. Refer to unit 15.5

3. Refer to unit 15.8, 15.10 and15.11

4. Refer to unit 15.15 and15.16

5. Price variance = (SR – AR) AQ for A = Rs. 4.50 ADV

For B = Rs.2.50 ADV total Rs.7 ADV

Usage variance: (SQ – AQ ) SP for A = 1.50 FAV

For B = 3.50 FAV Total Rs. 5 FAV

Page 321: smu account assignment solved

Cost Variance = MUV + MPV = 5 – 7 or 2 ADV

Mix variance = (RSQ – AQ) SP where RSQ = A 6 /8 x 6 or 4.5 kgs

B 6 /8 x 2 or 1.5 kgs

For A (4.5 – 5) x 1.5 or 0.75 ADV

For B (1.5 – 1) x 3.5 or 1.75 FAV Therefore total 1 FAV

6. Standard labor cost; Dept A 8000 x 0.30 = 2,400

B 6,000 x 0.35 = 2,100

Actual rate A 2000. / 8000 = 0..25

B 1800 / 5800 or 900 /29 paise

LRV = (SR – AR ) AH Dept A = (0.30 – 0.25) 8000 = 400 FAV

B = (.35 – 900 /25) x 5800 = 230 ADV

LEV = (SH – AH) SR for A = (8000 – 8000) x 0.30 Nil

B = (6000 – 5800) 0.35 70 ADV

LCV : (SLC – ALC For A (2400 – 2000) 400 FAV

B (2100 – 1800) 300 ADV

Reference Books:

1. Accounting for Managers by Jawahara Lal.

2. Financial Accounting by S. N. Maheswari.

3. Financial Accounting for Managers by R. Narayana Swamy.

4. Introduction to Management by Anthony Reece.

5. Management Accounting by Manmohan and Goel.

6. Cost and Management Accounting by Horugren etal.

Copyright © 2009 SMU

Page 322: smu account assignment solved

Powered by Sikkim Manipal University